AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Shared by: wuxiangyu
-
Stats
- views:
- 56
- posted:
- 8/10/2011
- language:
- English
- pages:
- 136
Document Sample


"Technical Information"
ADVANCED
AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS LABORATORY
(6AD)
* Center: "................................................................"
* Country: "................................................................"
* Date:
"................................................................"
* Issue:
"................................................................"
Quality Certificates:
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management European Union Certificate Certificates ISO 14000 and Worlddidac Quality Charter
(for Design, Manufacturing, (total safety) ECO-Management and Audit Scheme Certificate
Commercialization and After-sales service) (environmental management) (Worlddidac Member)
Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
(6AD)
Index
- Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out (Example).
- List of modules and teaching units included plus summarised catalogues
(included in priority 1 + 2 + 3).
Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out
ADVANCED
AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS LABORATORY
(Example of Priority 1)
(6AD)
32 cm
3,3 cm
STAND ALONG
NON TEACHING UNITS
90x40
EPID/T CEAC
OTHER TEACHING
UCP UCP-P
AND Unit INT Unit INT OTHER PRIORITIES Unit Unit
AND
DANGEROUS
STUDENT
SEMINARY
TOILET
UNITS
150x80
CEAB
Unit
WITH SCADA-NET
90x40
LOCAL NET
EDIBON
SYSTEM
EXPANSIONS SPACE
SERVICES
ESN
CRCI
SCADA-NET
Unit
TOILET MANAGER 100x40 MAIN
AIR
MAIN
WATER
MAIN
ELECTRICAL PROJECTOR
BLACKBOARD
PANEL CABINET CABINET
ELECTRONIC
ROOM
90x60
90x60
90x60
90x40
TEACHER
CECI
06x051
Unit
150x80
9 cm
2,7 cm
DESK
90x60
90x40
TOILET
STOCK 1,4 cm
90x60
90x60
CPVMI
EMERGENCY DOOR
Unit
90x60
COMPUTER
CONTROLLED
150x80
150x80
150x80
UNITS
NON TEACHING UNITS
OTHER TEACHING
AND
90x40
90x40
90x40
SCE INT RYC INT OTHER PRIORITIES PLCE PLC-IN SBB
Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit
ROOM 1 ROOM 2 ROOM 3
1,5 cm
1,6 cm 25 cm
Web-cam
Teaching Unit 150x80 cm Table office
Computer for each Teaching Unit Unit
Electronic
Teacher and Student Desk with INT 48x35 cm 90x60 cm Shelves
Interface E: 1:100
computers
90x40 Cupboard
80x30 Table
Table for Teaching Unit
EDIBON ESN SCADA-NET
Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
(6AD)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 1
0610: PLC Trainer
0620: PLC Process Emulators Applications Module.
0621: PLC Small Scale Real Applications Module
0633/10S: Industrial PLC (Any) .
0650: Automation & System Module
0651: Automation (Regulation and Control) Module
0652: Automation (Control) Module.
0600/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Automation & Systems units
Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
PLC TRAINER
Ref: 0610 1 / 1
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLCE PLC TRAINER 1
2 0620PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
3 0620PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
4 0620IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
5 0620CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
6 0620TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
7 0620MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1 PLC-PI Unit: 1.- Control of theparticular unit 9.- PLC process application for the
process through the control particular unit.
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a interface box without the 10.- PLC structure.
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, computer. 11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the 2.- PID control. configuration.
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON 3.- Visualization of all the sensors 12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
Computerized Teaching Unit). values used in the particular 13.- PLC program languages.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. unit process. 14.- PLC different programming
Front panel: 4.- Calibration of all sensors standard languages (ladder
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs. included in the particular unit diagram (LD), structured text
process. (ST), instructions list (IL),
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs. 5.- Hand on of all the actuators sequential function chart
Touch screen. involved in the particular unit (SFC), function block diagram
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC process. (FBD)).
Inside: 6.- Realization of different 15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable. experiments, in automatic way, development of new process.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program without having in front the 16.- Hand on an established process.
particular unit. (These 17.- To visualize and see the results
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control. experiments can be decided
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. previously). and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC). 7.- Simulation of outside actions, 18.- Possibility of creating new
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software: in the cases do not exist process in relation with the
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit. hardware elements. (Example: particular unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
test of complementary tanks, 19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. environment to the process to 20.- Own PLC applications in
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. be studied, etc). accordance with teacher and
8.- PLC hardware general use. student requirements.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
6.- Systems & Automatics
2 3
PLC PLCE
Programming Touch Screen
Software Programming Software
1 Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard Using the PLC Programing Software:
1 PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple 1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, The programs can be written in several programming languages:
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. Function block diagram. (FBD).
Front panel: 2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push 3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of 4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital 5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass 6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
connections (GND). Touch screen. established in a variable.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC). 7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
Inside: 8.- How to use analog inputs.
Power supply 100... 240V (AC). 9.- How to use analog outputs.
Panasonic PLC: 10.- Use of temporizers.
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32 11.- Logic functions implementation.
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control. 12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. 13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming. 14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
2 PLC Programming Software: 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages 16.- Functions library.
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential 17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration, 18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words, * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
function blocks, inputs/outputs... Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers, 20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC 21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software words).
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions 22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse 23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
of programs is easy. 24.- Switching from one screen to another.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software: * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy Other practical possibilities:
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
Editor. causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. happens in the outputs.
4 -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx. (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ output, (for example: a pump).
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC PROCESS EMULATORS APPLICATIONS MODULE
Ref: 0620 1 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLCE-CST TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROL 1
2 PLCE-AV CAR PARKING 1
3 PLCE-AG2Z TWO ZONES PARKING GARAGE 1
4 PLCE-CA ELEVATOR CONTROL 1
5 PLCE-CLA AUTOMATIC WASHING MACHINE CONTROL 1
6 PLCE-MB DRINKS MACHINE 1
7 PLCE-MBC HOT DRINKS MACHINE 1
8 PLCE-CB PUMP CONTROL 1
9 PLCE-MA EMBOSSING MACHINE 1
10 PLCE-ST DRILLING SYSTEM 1
11 PLCE-SBAR DIRTY-WATER PUMP SYSTEM 1
12 PLCE-SBP PUMP SYSTEM (PRESSURE) 1
13 PLCE-SL CLEANING SYSTEM 1
14 PLCE-SALL AUTOMATIC FILLING SYSTEM 1
15 PLCE-SBT CONVEYOR BELTS SYSTEM 1
16 PLCE-SCCT CONVEYOR CHARGING SYSTEM 1
17 PLCE-SCA CANALIZATION SYSTEM 1
18 PLCE-SDT PIPE BENDING SYSTEM 1
19 PLCE-PAE AUTOMATIC STAMPING PRESS 1
20 PLCE-PLLT FILLING PROCESS OF TANKS 1
21 PLCE-SCC COLLECTING BELT CONVEYOR 1
22 PLCE-MCC MAILS ALLOCATION MACHINE 1
23 PLCE-RAC COMPRESSED AIR NETWORK 1
24 PLCE-TC COAL TREATMENT 1
25 PLCE-PELE PACKING LINE AND BOTTLING PLANT 1
26 PLCE-CA2P TWO-DOORS ACCESS CONTROL 1
27 PLCE-CI FIRE CONTROL 1
28 PLCE-CP PROXIMITY CONTROL 1
29 PLCE-CCO SLUICE GATE CONTROL 1
30 PLCE-CNC LEVEL AND FLOW CONTROL 1
31 PLCE-CNTA WATER TOWER LEVEL CONTROL 1
32 PLCE-CF PHOTO CONTROL 1
33 PLCE-CMM MOLDING MACHINE CONTROL 1
34 PLCE-CPOS POSITION CONTROL 1
35 PLCE-CS SILO CONTROL 1
36 PLCE-CACV VEHICLE FEEDING & LOADING CONTROL 1
37 PLCE-ACC FEEDING AND LOADING CONTROL 1
38 PLCE-CML LIQUIDS BLENDING CONTROL 1
39 PLCE-CME MIXER CONTROL 1
40 PLCE-CR REACTOR CONTROL 1
41 PLCE-CCP COUNT AND POSITION CONTROL 1
42 PLCE-CL ROLLING MILL CONTROL 1
Ref: 0620 2 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
43 PLCE-CTRA WORKCELL APPLICATION 1
44 PLCE-CTI TOWER LIGHTING CONTROL 1
45 PLCE-AC BUFFER STORAGE 1
46 PLCE-RT TEMPERATURE REGULATION 1
47 PLCE-CSC HEATING SYSTEM CONTROL 1
48 PLCE-CSV VENTILATION SYSTEM CONTROL 1
49 PLCE-M MOTOR CONTROL 1
50 PLCE-MPP STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL 1
51 PLCE-MET STAR-DELTA CONNECTION 1
52 PLCE-MCETI REVERSING STAR-DELTA CONNECTION 1
53 PLCE-MD DAHLANDER MOTOR CIRCUIT 1
54 PLCE-M2BS MOTOR WITH 2 SEPARATE WINDINGS 1
55 PLCE-MAC STARTING A WOUND-ROTOR MOTOR 1
56 PLCE-AN ANNUNCIATOR 1
57 PLCE-SLU RUNNING LIGHT 1
58 PLCE-CPR REACTIVE CURRENT COMPENSATION 1
59 PLCE-MCI REVERSING CONTACTOR 1
60 0620PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
61 0620PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
62 0620IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
63 0620CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
64 0620TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
65 0620MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0620 3 / 3
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Traffic and Parking
PLCE-CST. Traffic Signal Control
It represents an automatic traffic signal control where is possible to
emulate a traffic crossroads.
We can select the operation mode choosing between day or night and
to control the traffic state using traffic lights and vehicle detectors.
The pedestrians can request to stop the vehicles flow pushing a button.
PLCE-AV. Car Parking
It represents a car parking where is possible to emulate the elements
used in a typical car parking like barriers, vehicles presence detectors,
traffic lights, fire sensors.
We can know the number of vehicles inside the parking with lights and
if the parking is full or free.
PLCE-AG2Z. Two Zones Parking Garage
It represents a parking garage with two zones where is possible to
emulate the control of four barriers, two in the entrances an two in the
exits, in the automatic parking.
We can know the number of vehicles inside the parking with lights and
if the parking is full or free.
Page 8 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Small Industrial Machines
PLCE-CA. Elevator Control
It represents an elevator control allowing to emulate the sequence of
actions of an elevator in a three floors building.
The elevator’s state using different sensors and lights can be
demonstrated.
It is included elements like alarms, lights and calling buttons in the
emulation, etc.
The sequence of actions in the elevator’s control panel can be seen
too.
PLCE-CLA. Automatic Washing Machine Control
It represents an automatic washing machine control allowing to
emulate the sequence of actions carried out by a washing machine.
We can start/stop the system, to use the three program selector, the
temperature control and to know the machine’s state using different
sensors and lights which indicates us the machine’s actions and its
state.
PLCE-MB. Drinks Machine
It represents an automatic drinks machine where we have the
possibility of work with a complete scheme of actions of an automatic
drinks machine.
We can select a drink, to insert coins, to obtain drinks, the coins can be
returned pushing a button and is possible to simulate the fault of drinks
in different columns.
PLCE-MBC. Hot Drinks Machine
It represents an automatic hot drinks machine where we have the
possibility of work with a complete scheme of actions of an automatic
hot drinks machine.
We can select a drink, we can know the level of drink using sensors and
the status of the machine.
Finally we can select sugar and extra-milk.
Page 9 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CB. Pump Control
It represents a pump control where we have four pumps inserting water
in a big tank.
We can regulate the number of pumps working and to know the level
of water into the tank using level sensors.
Is possible to regulate the discharge rate with the output valve in the
tank.
PLCE-MA. Embossing Machine
It represents the embossing process of metal disks controlled with an
electropneumatic system.
The valves regulate the flow of gas to the electropneumatic system
moving the steel punches and we can know the position of the steel
punches using position sensors.
Page 10 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Small Industrial Systems
PLCE-ST. Drilling System
It represents a drilling system where we can emulate the movements of
a drill.
We have two motors one for vertical movements and the other one is
the motor of the drill.
We can switch on/off the coolant valve and to select the clamping
pressure.
PLCE-SBAR. Dirty-Water Pump System
It represents a dirty-water pump system where we can emulate the
control of the dirty-water flow using a valve and two pumps which
insert dirty-water in the pipe from the dirty-water tank.
The level of dirty-water into the tank is measured using four level
sensors.
PLCE-SBP Pump System (Pressure)
.
It represents a pressure system where we use two pumps with their
motors when we have to introduce air in the tank.
We can activate or deactivate the pumps with the three-phase
contactors.
In the tank we have two level sensors and a pressure sensor.
The output of the pressured air is controlled using a flow sensor.
PLCE-SL. Cleaning System
It represents a cleaning system where is possible to emulate the
movement of a basket which has vertical movements.
The electrovalve has three positions and it can move the basket from its
position to the designated position with a manual regulator.
We can know the position of the basket using position sensors.
Page 11 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-SALL. Automatic Filling System
It represents an automatic filling system where we can choose the
number of elements packed in each pack.
We can emulate the motors and the presence sensor of the system
working.
We can emulate the movement of the conveyor belt with the packs in
this filling process.
PLCE-SBT. Conveyor Belts System
It represents a conveyor belts system where is possible to emulate a
system of sand transport.
We can activate or deactivate the three motors using the three-phase
contactors.
We have the possibility of simulate faults in the three-phase fuses and
the three-phase magnetothermics.
PLCE-SCCT. Conveyor Charging System
It represents a conveyor charging system where is possible to emulate
the work of four conveyor belts switching on/off their motors and we
can open or close three lock gates.
With this system we can control the conveyor charge process.
PLCE-SCA. Canalization System
It represents a channeling system where we have a dam which provides
water using a general pipe with a general valve.
This general pipe provides water to other pipes, those pipes provides
water to the houses, parks, etc using their own little valves.
In the homes the valves which regulate the water flow are taps.
Page 12 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-SDT. Pipe Bending System
It represents a pipe bending system where we can emulate the bending
process of the pipe.
We can start/stop the system using a switch and to know the state of the
machine with maximum/minimum sensors, to insert pipes with an
electrovalve and to control the conveyor belt.
We will know if we have a pipe in the machine with the piece presence
sensor.
PLCE-PAE. Automatic Stamping Press
It represents an automatic stamping press where is possible to emulate
the pressing process of steel sheets.
We can know the state of the press and electrovalve with the
maximum/minimum sensors.
The press has a piece presence sensor, and warning lights.
We can control the rollers and the conveyor belt with switches.
Page 13 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Big Industrial Systems
PLCE-PLLT. Filling Process of Tanks
It represents a filling process of tanks with three tanks where we can
emulate the filling and emptying processes of the tanks and the level of
the liquid inside the tanks.
Is possible to switch on or switch off the different input or output valves
of each tank.
PLCE-SCC. Collecting Belt Conveyor
It represents a collecting belt conveyor system where is possible to
emulate five conveyor belts transporting different materials to the
general conveyor belt.
We can activate or deactivate the five conveyor belt motors and switch
on/off the general conveyor belt in two directions left and right.
PLCE-MCC. Mails Allocation Machine
It represents a mails allocation machine which allocate the mails to
different cities.
It uses five motors, one for each city and a conveyor belt.
We can activate or deactivate each motor and the general conveyor
belt.
The general system can be activated or deactivated.
PLCE-RAC. Compressed Air Network
It represents a compressed air network where is possible to emulate
the actions in an air network.
We can control valves, dryer, motors with contactors and we can know
the flow in the output of the compressor with a sensor.
The electrovalve moves the final piston.
Page 14 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-TC. Coal Treatment
It represents a coal treatment system where we can see three chutes
with three valves each one and a big tank.
We can control the flow of coal with the three valves and is possible to
know if the tank or the chutes are full using coal presence sensors.
PLCE-PELE. Packing Line and Bottling Plant
It represents an automatic packing line and bottling machine where is
possible to emulate the processes of bottling, sealing, labeling,
packing and palletizing.
In this automatic plant we can control the movement of the conveyor
belt and to obtain information about the process using sensors.
Page 15 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Simple Control Applications
PLCE-CA2P Two-Doors Access Control
.
It represents two automatic doors where is possible to emulate the
movements and positions of each automatic door using sensors and
electrical motors.
We have the option of activate or deactivate the electrical motors.
The doors can be opened using the presence sensors.
PLCE-CI. Fire Control
It represents a fire control station where is possible to emulate different
emergency situations with fire.
We have the possibility of activate and deactivate the alarm buttons,
the fire detectors, the uninterruptible power supply, the elevator, the
emergency door, the exit signs, and the temperature sensors.
We can also activate the water pump.
PLCE-CP Proximity Control (security)
.
It represents a proximity and presence security control where we can
obtain information about the presence in different places of a bank
office using a PIR sensor, presence sensor, magnetic sensor and
infrared electronic barriers.
The office has an alarm and a bell.
We can also activate a security camera and the security key.
PLCE-CCO. Sluice Gate Control
It represents a sluice gate control where we can see three sluice gates
and we have to control them using the water pumps and the gates
control.
We can start/stop the system using the general switch and we have the
possibility of faults using the fuses and the magnetothermics.
Page 16 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CNC. Level and Flow Control
It represents a level and flow control where we can fill the tank with
water.
We can control the water supply and the water outflow with an
electrovalve.
We know the state of the tank with a capacitance probe which shows
the level of water in the tank with lights.
PLCE-CNTA. Water Tower Level Control
It represents a water tower level control where is possible to emulate
the water flow control with the input valve and the motor of the pump.
We can measure the level of water in the tank and in the water tower
using sensors.
PLCE-CF. Photo Control
It represents a photo control machine where is possible to emulate the
functions of the camera, dryer, flash and printer.
We have a photo presence sensor, a coin presence sensor and the
return coins possibility.
Finally we can switch on/off the machine.
PLCE-CMM. Molding Machine Control
It represents a molding machine control where we can emulate a
machine which gives shape to the pieces pushing them.
It works with three electrovalves which we can activate or deactivate,
each electrovalve has a limit switch.
Page 17 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CPOS. Position Control
It represents a position control where we can move the sheet to the
correct position using a motor with a lefthand and righthand rotation
and crowling speed the incremental shaft encoder can count pulses
and to give a fine sincronism.
We have the possibility of saw the sheet connecting the saw motor.
PLCE-CS. Silo Control
It represents a silo control system where we can emulate the filling
process.
The filling motor has a manual rate or an automatic rate and the
output valve has its own discharge rate.
We can measure the level with four presence sensors and to know if the
silo is full with the full sensor.
PLCE-CACV. Vehicle Feeding & Loading Control
It represents a vehicle feeding control where we use three conveyor
belts to transport the material to the vehicles.
We can switch on/off each conveyor belt and the valves.
We have two traffic lights which can indicate when the vehicle can start
its movement and a weight vehicle sensor.
Page 18 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Industrial Control Applications
PLCE-ACC. Feeding and Loading Control
It represents a feeding and loading control system where we can
control the voltage in the load between the A-B terminals.
We have to select a configuration which activate or deactivate the
mosfets and we can know what switch is closed with its own light.
We can see in the graph the state of the voltage in the load between the
A-B terminals.
PLCE-CML. Liquids Blending Control
It represents a liquids blending control where is possible to emulate
the mix of different liquids and their flows are regulated using four
valves.
The liquids are mixed using a mixer with its own motor.
The flow of the mix is regulated using an output valve.
We can measure the temperature and the level of liquid with sensors.
PLCE-CME. Mixer Control
It represents a mixer control where we can emulate the mix with two
different products in a big chute from two little chutes using conveyor
belts, finally the general conveyor belt will transport the mix.
We will control the motors of the conveyor belts and the valves in the
system and we will know the big chute's level using sensors.
PLCE-CR. Reactor Control
It represents a reactor control where is possible to emulate the mix of a
catalyst, an inert gas and the substance.
We can regulate the catalyst and the inert gas flow with valves, and the
substance with a pump.
The inlet and the output of the product are regulated using valves.
We mix the substances with an agitator into the reactor.
Page 19 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CCP Count and Position Control
.
It represents a count and position control where is possible to emulate
the robot’s movement selecting the general final position.
It shows with lights the final selected position of each motor.
We can know when the robot is opening or closing its hand and when it
has taken a piece with light signals.
PLCE-CL. Rolling Mill Control
It represents a rolling mill control where is possible to emulate the
position of rolling mill, the movement of the different motors and the
position of the conveyor belt using an electrovalve.
We can obtain information about the presence and the thickness of
each sheet of metal using sensors.
PLCE-CTRA. WorkCell Application
It represents a workcell with a robot inside where is possible to emulate
the automatic work of a robot and the conveyor belts.
We can activate or deactivate the conveyor belts and start/stop the
general system.
We have input and output sensors and a light which indicates when the
robot is working.
PLCE-CTI. Tower Lighting Control
It represents a tower lighting control where is possible to emulate the
lighting of different levels of a tower using a lights system.
It has two directions up and down and we can know the level using a
display.
Page 20 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Thermal Applications
PLCE-AC. Buffer Storage
It represents a buffer storage system where is possible to emulate the
storage of heat using fluids.
We can control the valves state, the pumps, the boiler, and the buffer
storage tank state.
Is possible to know when the collector is working using a sensor.
PLCE-RT. Temperature Regulation
It represents a temperature regulation system where we can control the
temperature inside our home.
We can regulate the temperature using the thermostat and the
temperature sensor.
The heater and the solar cells will heat the water inside the water circuit
and it will fill the radiator heating the house.
PLCE-CSC. Heating System Control
It represents a heating system control where is possible to emulate the
heating process controlling the flow of hot water into the circuit
activating or deactivating the valves in the pipes and using the
temperature control regulator.
We can start/stop the system using a general switch.
PLCE-CSV. Ventilation System Control
It represents a ventilation system control where we are trying to clean
the air in a garage.
We can control the air inside measuring the level of CO and smoke
with sensors.
We can activate four pumps and two fans.
Is possible to control the traffic lights and the automatic barriers.
Page 21 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Electrical Machines Control (Motors)
PLCE-M. Motor Control
It represents a motor control where is possible to emulate the
movements of a three-phase motor with both turning directions
controlled by three-phase contactors.
In the secondary, we can use the three-phase contactors with the star
or delta connection.
PLCE-MPP Stepper Motor Control
.
It represents a motor control where is possible to emulate the stepper
motor.
We can start/stop the stepper motor using a switch.
It has reverse/forward directions controlled by a switch, and it can be
controlled in manual or automatic mode.
The speed regulation is controlled using three switches and the
position is controlled using an encoder.
PLCE-MET. Star-Delta Connection
It represents a star-delta connection in the secondary and emulates
the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor and connect the secondary in
star-delta connection using the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
PLCE-MCETI. Reversing Star-Delta Connection
It represents a reversing motor with star-delta connection in the
secondary and emulates the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions and
connect the secondary in star-delta connection using the three-phase
contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
Page 22 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-MD. Dahlander Motor Circuit
It represents a Dahlander motor which has two connections of velocity
with 2 and 4 poles and emulates the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions and to
connect it with 2 or 4 poles using the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
PLCE-M2BS. Motor with 2 Separate Windings
It represents a motor with two separate windings and emulates the
motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor and to connect the different
windings and the secondary with the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
PLCE-MAC. Starting a Wound-Rotor Motor
It represents the starting of a wound-rotor motor where is possible to
emulate the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor and to connect the secondary
with different loads with the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
Page 23 www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
Alarms/Current
PLCE-AN. Annunciator
It represents an annunciator where is possible to emulate the
operation of one of this machines which shows what button is pushed
lighting the button pushed.
We have an annunciator with several buttons and near of the
annunciator we have an electrical scheme which shows what switch is
activated or deactivated.
PLCE-SLU. Running Lights
It represents a running lights system where we can emulate the control
of the eight lights in different speed, sequence and direction.
We can start/stop the system using a switch and we can do it in
automatic or manual state.
We have three kinds of sequences and two directions and an speed
control.
PLCE-CPR. Reactive Current Compensation
It represents a reactive current compensation system where is possible
to emulate the connection of three-phase capacitive loads.
We can connect each load using the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses.
PLCE-MCI. Reversing Contactor
It represents a three-phase motor with reversing contactors and
emulates the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions using
the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
Page 24 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC SMALL SCALE REAL APPLICATIONS MODULE
Ref: 0621 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLCE-BS1 VIBRATION AND/OR DEFORMATION TEST MODULE 1
2 PLCE-BS2 TEMPERATURE TEST MODULE 1
3 PLCE-BS3 PRESSURE TEST MODULE 1
4 PLCE-BS4 FLOW TEST MODULE 1
5 PLCE-BS5 OVENS TEST MODULE 1
6 PLCE-BS6 LIQUID LEVEL TEST MODULE 1
7 PLCE-BS7 TACHOMETERS TEST MODULE 1
8 PLCE-BS8 PROXIMITY TEST MODULE 1
9 PLCE-BS9 PNEUMATIC TEST MODULE 1
10 PLCE-BS10 LIGHT TEST MODULE 1
11 0621PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
12 0621PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
13 0621IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP 1
14 0621CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
15 0621TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
16 0621MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0621 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
Sensors
PLCE-BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Extensiometric gauges:
Gauges of a metallic material that vary their resistance depending on the distortion
to which they are going to be subjected.
They are stacked in different positions so that during the vibrant bar movement
some of them suffer compressions and others extensions.
Characteristics:
Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W.
Gauge factor at 24ºC: 2.120.
Heating resistance and thermocouple:
Resistance used to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar and to see
how this situation affects the extensiometric gauges.
A K thermocouple place near the resistance measures the bar temperature.
Characteristics:
Temperature range: -50ºC to 350ºC.
LVDT Sensor:
Linear displacement sensor, that detects the relative displacement of a
ferromagnetic core between the primary and the secondary.
Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 405 x 300 x 350 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
PLCE-BS2. Temperature Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Bimetallic switch sensor:
Bimetallic contact thermal switch.
Opening temperature: 50ºC.
Closing temperature: 30ºC.
Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor that allows minimizing the
differential cycles and preventing overpeaks.
Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC.
Relay AC:
It allows to turn on and off the heater light bulbs placed over the temperature
sensors.
Voltage and current (nominal): 250V-10A.
3 sockets.
Switching voltage: 12 V.
Capillary thermostat:
Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
Max. bulb temperature: 150ºC.
Socket current: 15A, 250V AC.
Thermocouples:
3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K.
One of them is placed near the capillary thermostat and the bimetallic sensor,
another on the adjustable bimetallic thermostat and the third one inside the
magnetic collection.
Each one of them is used to measure the temperature that each one of the sensor
are controlling.
Temperature range: -50 ºC to 250 ºC.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 405 x 280 x 335 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 25 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS3. Pressure Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer):
Resistor range: 500 W to 5KW.
Operation force: 200-750g.
LVDT sensor:
Sensibility: 780mV/mm.
Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc.
Total path: 2.5mm.
Differential pressure sensor:
Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Power supply range: 10 to 16 Vdc.
Extensiometric gauges:
Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120W.
Gauge factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical.
Nominal resistor tolerance: ± 0.5%.
Manometric pressure sensor:
Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi.
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Power supply range: 10 to 16 Vdc.
Absolute pressure sensor:
Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
Sensibility: -11mV/psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Power supply range: 10 to 12 Vdc.
Air Compressor:
Air flow: 10 l /min.
Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2.
Power supply: 220V, 50/60Hz.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 400 x 270 x 320 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 26 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS4. Flow Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Flow optical sensor:
It gives an output in pulses proportional to the liquid flow. It is made up of a paddle
wheel, placed on the fluid current that turns producing a pulse signal while passing
between the emitter and the paddle detector.
Power supply: 4.5 to 24Vdc.
Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM.
High resolution optical flow sensor:
It works in the same way as the sensor just described with the difference that it is
able to measure with a good resolution very low flow. At the output of this sensor we
get a pulse signal with a frequency proportional to the flow volume that crosses the
sensor.
Power supply: 5Vdc.
Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5 l/min.
Temperature range: -40ºC to 70ºC.
Underwater pump:
The variation in the pump power supply voltage enables to change the water
volume in the test module.
Level sensor by pressure:
It is a differential pressure sensor that measures the pressure practice by the water in
relation to the atmospheric pressure, so the liquid level in the tank can be calculated.
Pressure range: 0 to 1psi.
Output at scale bottom: 16.7mV.
Sensitivity: 16.7mV/psi.
Overpressure: 20psi.
Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system):
This sensor is connected to a hole-board system to measure the pressure difference
caused by the volume narrowing of the conduct through which the water flows.
On this way, with the measurement of the pressure difference between the hole
board water output and input, it is possible to calculate the water volume that
crosses the board.
Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
Sensitivity: 3.33mV/psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Changeable flow meter:
Using a small floating buoy that is inside the tube calibrated in liter/minute, it can
be read the volume measure flowing through the pipe.
Range: 0-2 l/min.
V narrowing:
The connection between the main and the secondary tank, a dam, includes a "V"
narrowing. The altitude of the water level above the dam bottom is a very precise
measure of the flow relation. The ruler fixed on the right end of the tank will show
this height. Main and secondary tanks.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 405 x 280 x 400 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 27 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS5. Ovens Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Oven chamber.
Heating resistance:
Oven heating resistance made up of two parallel resistances with a maximum
dissipation power of 500W.
The heating element power supply is of 0-30V AC.
Inside the heating element there is a temperature sensor element.
Fan:
Fan with changeable speed that can be operated varying the fan energy supply
voltage.
Energy supply voltage: +12 Vdc (max).
Maximum power: 0.96 W.
Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s.
Thermocouples:
4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a different height.
Temperature range:-184ºC to 400ºC.
Platinum resistance thermometer:
Platinum resistance temperature detector, suitable for measuring air and gas
temperatures.
Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC.
Resistance (0ºC): 100+/-0.1W.
Thermistor:
NTC thermistor for temperature measurement and control, with great sensitivity
and stability.
Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW.
Temperature range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
Semiconductor temperature sensor:
Reverse polarized diode. The current through the diode depends on the
temperature at which balance with the surrounding environment is achieved.
Therefore it needs a conditioning circuit able to transform this current variation in
voltage proportional to temperature.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 405 x 300 x 470 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 28 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS6. Liquid Level Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Water tanks.
Capacitative level sensor:
Level sensor immersed in the tank.
Power supply: 24 Vdc (max).
Output: 11-20mAdc.
Pressure level sensor.
It is a differential pressure sensor that measures the pressure practiced by the water
compared to the atmospheric pressure.
Pressure range: 0-1psi.
Sensibility: 16.7mV/psi.
Excitation Voltage: 10-16 Vdc.
Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning switches:
It is a resistance fixed to a float arm that will vary its position compared to the water
level. This system complements itself with two end and beginning path switches
respectively.
Nominal value: 250V-10A.
Switching current of the path end and beginning switches: 5 A/220Vac.
Conduction sensor:
This sensor works with two electrodes immersed in one of the tanks. As the water
level rises and covers the electrodes its resistance will decrease until it arrives to KW
unit values, as long as the water does not touch the electrodes, the resistance
between them will be very big and will behave like an open circuit.
Magnetic float level sensor:
Sensor formed by a small float that has inside a magnetic element, the float base
has a Hall effect element that detects when the float has gone up due to the effect of
the water.
Switching voltage: 240Vac, 110Vac.
Max. switching current: 0.6Amp.
Optical level sensor:
It is a photodiode and phototransistor, which in presence of water changes its
refraction properties and make the output state approximately change from 3Vdc
to 0Vdc.
Power supply: 5Vdc.
Load current: 20mA max. at 125ºC.
2 Minipumps:
The volume supplied by these pumps can be regulated varying the dc voltage value
with which they are supplied.
Power supply: 12Vdc (max. Voltage).
Nominal volume: 1 l/minute.
Nominal current: 1 A DC.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 400 x 300 x 400 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 29 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS7. Tachometers Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Inductive Sensor:
Output voltage: up to 10 Vpp.
Body-housing material: Steel.
Operating temp. range: -40ºC to +60ºC.
DC Motor:
Nominal voltage: 12V.
Resistance: 9,7 Oh.
Max. vacuum speed: 8500 r.p.m.
Max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m.
Start voltage: 210mV.
DC Tachometer:
Voltage rating: 1.5V(dc).
Power rating: 1.21W.
Refractive Infrared Sensor:
Sensor where an infrared emitting diode and an NPN silicon phototransistor
encased side-by-side on coverging optical axes in a black thermoplastic housing.
Vo in output bornes of the module: 0.0-400mV for Vs=12VDC.
Slot Sensor:
Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output phototransistor are
capsulated.
Vo in output bornes of the module: 0.0-5V for Vs=5VDC.
Hall Effect:
Hall-effect position sensor where exist a relationship between supply voltage and
the combined effects of a change in sensitivity (gain) and null voltage output at
room temperature.
Supply Voltage: 4 to 10V.
Supply Current: 3.5mA.
Output type: Differential.
Output voltage: 0 to 0.25V at 5V, 0 gauss.
Sensitivity: (-400 to +400 gauss); 0.75 to 1.06 mV/gauss.
Vo in output bornes of the module: 0.0-1V for Vs=5VDC.
Encoder:
This optical encoder contains a lensed LED source, an integrated circuit with
detectors and output circuit, and a codewheel which rotates between the emitter
and the detector IC.
Operating temperature: -40 to 100ºC.
Supply voltage: -0.5 to 7 V.
Output voltage: -0.5 to Vdc.
Output current per channnel voltage: -1 to 5 mA.
Vibration: 20 g, 5 to 1000 Hz.
Velocity: 30000 r.p.m.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 300 x 200 x 200 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 30 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS8. Proximity Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
DC Motor:
Nominal power supply: 12Vdc.
Proximity capacitative sensor:
It can detect metallic objects.
Detection distance: 10 mm.
Output: 10-60V Imax = 200mA.
Power supply voltage: 10-60V.
Hall effect sensor:
Proximity switch using the Hall effect, switching when there is a magnetic field.
Power supply voltage: 5Vdc.
Magnetic flux density: works at 22mT (35mT max), output voltage: low: 85mV.,
high: Vdc.
Infrared sensor by reflection:
Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Emitter: VF(max): 1.7, VR (min): 3V., radiation power: 4.8mW, peak wavelength:
935nm.
Receiver: Vc (max): 12Vdc., Ic (min): 8mA., Darkness current: 100nA.
Transmission infrared sensor:
Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Emitter: VF (max): 1.7, VR (min): 3V., radiation power: 4.8mW., peak wavelength:
935nm.
Receiver: Vc (max): 30V., Ic (min): 8mA., Darkness current: 100nA.
Conduction sensor:
Proximity sensor with plate sensible to magnetic fields. Contact material: Rhode.
Output: NO-NC.
Breaking voltage: 400V.
DC or AC current (max) 0.6Amp.
Inductive sensor:
Sensor that gives variations in the output voltage as a variation of the magnetic
field, caused by the near ferromagnetic material movement.
Inductance: 12mH.
Winding Resistance: 130 Oh.
Detection distance: 2mm.
Ultrasound sensor:
Transmitter sensibility: 106 dB.
Receiver sensibility: -65 dB.
Resonance frequency: 40kHz.
Operation distance: 40 cm.
Output voltage: 20V rms.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 400 x 270 x 200 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Page 31 www.edibon.com
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE
PLCE-BS9. Pneumatic Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Real industrial elements.
Proportional valve 1 and 2:
Nominal voltage: 24Vdc.
Pressure range: 8 bar maximum, 0 to 6 bar control.
Linearity: 1% full scale.
Differential pressure sensor:
Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
Sensitivity: 3.33mV/psi.
Power supply range: 10 to 16 Vdc.
Pneumatic switch:
Activation: 20 to 24Vdc.
Positions: 2.
Maximum pressure: 6 bars.
LVDT Sensor:
Power-supply voltage: 9 to 24Vdc.
Sensitivity: 60mV/mm/10Vdc.
Regulation filter:
Manual drainage.
Maximum input pressure: 8 bars.
Flux: 14.5 dm3/s.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 300 x 300 x 300 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
PLCE-BS10. Light Test Module
Specifications:
Painted steel box.
Connection diagrams for each transducer are represented graphically.
Photodiode:
This sensor converts light into either current or voltage, depending upon the mode
of operation.
Phototransistor:
It also consists of a photodiode with internal gain.
Light Dependent Resistor:
A LDR is a resistor whose resistance decreases with increasing incident light
intensity.
Photovoltaic Cell:
A photovoltaic cell converts solar radiation into direct current electricity.
Infrared emitter-receiver:
This element consists of a IR emitter LED and IR phototransistor.
D-SUB to communicate with PLCE.
Connection pins.
Dimensions: 405 x 300 x 350 mm. approx. Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
*Specifications subject to change without previous notice, due to the convenience of improvements of the product.
REPRESENTATIVE:
C/ Del Agua, 14. Polígono Industrial San José de Valderas.
28918 LEGANÉS. (Madrid). SPAIN.
Phone: 34-91-6199363 FAX: 34-91-6198647
E-mail: edibon@edibon.com WEB site: www.edibon.com
Issue: ED01/11
Date: March/2011
Page 32
issue:01/11
INDUSTRIAL PLC (ANY) (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0633/10S 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLC-IN PLC INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM 1
2 PLC-IN-1 MOTOR CONTROL APPLICATION 1
3 PLC-IN-2 SERVO MOTOR CONTROL APPLICATION 1
4 PLC-IN/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR PLC 10
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
5 PLC-IN/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE FOR PLC 10
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM
6 INS/SOF CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE 1
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
7 0631PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
8 0631PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
9 0631IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP 1
10 0631CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
11 0631TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
12 0631MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0633/10S 2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automation (PLC Small Scale Real Applications)
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=automationsystems&subarea=plcrealapplications&lang=en
PLCE. PLC Trainer
2 3
PLC PLCE
Programming Touch Screen
Software Programming Software
1 Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
NE
PLC Small Scale Real Applications for working with PLCE: W
6.- Automation & Systems
Sensors
PLCE-BS1. PLCE-BS2. PLCE-BS3. PLCE-BS4.
Vibration and/or Deformation Temperature Test Module Pressure Test Module Flow Test Module
Test Module
PLCE-BS5. PLCE-BS6. PLCE-BS7. PLCE-BS8.
Ovens Test Module Liquid Level Test Module Tachometers Test Module Proximity Test Module
NE
Other available Applications: W
Conveyors
Elevators
PLCE-BS9. PLCE-BS10.
Pneumatic Test Module Light Test Module
6.3- Automation (Industrial PLC Applications)
www.edibon.com/products/index.php?area=automationsystems&subarea=plcindustrial&lang=en
PLC-IN. PLC Industrial Control System NEW
Available Industrial PLC Applications:
- PLC-IN-1. Motor Control Application
- PLC-IN-2. Servo Motor Control Application
Etc.
www.edibon.com Page 36
issue:01/11
AUTOMATION AND SYSTEMS MODULE
Ref: 0650 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 SCE COMPUTER CONTROLLED GENERATIONS STATIONS 1
CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR, FORMED BY:
SCE.Unit GENERATIONS STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION 1
SIMULATOR
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
SCE/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR GENERATIONS
STATIONS CONTROL AND REGULATION SIMULATOR
2 SCE/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
GENERATING STATIONS CONTROL SIMULATOR
(SYSTEMS ENGINEERING) (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
3 SBB BALL-BEAM SYSTEM 1
4 SBB/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BALL- 1
BEAM SYSTEM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
5 CPVM POSITION CONTROL ANS "DC" MOTOR 1
6 CPVM/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
POSITION CONTROL AND DC MOTOR (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
7 0650PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
8 0650PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
9 0650IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP 1
10 0650CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
11 0650TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
12 0650MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0650 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.1- Systems
SCE. Computer Controlled Generating Stations Control and Regulation Simulator (Systems Engineering)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2 3
Data Software for:
- Computer Control
Acquisition - Data Acquisition
Board - Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
1 Unit: SCE. Generating Stations Control and Regulation
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Simulator (System Engineering), including
control interface
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Modelization of the motor 11.- Comparative analysis of the
1 SCE Unit:
as a standard motor. transient response of the
Unit designed to simulate the regulation behaviour of a hydroelectric generating station ,as
a didactic application with different aspects of regulation, control and simulation. 2.- Modelization of the motor turbine real motor vs the
Anodized aluminum structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the of with the constants corrections transient response of the
the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in stainless steel. of the mathematical model. simulated motor for
It is possible to work with this unit in 2 ways: inductive load.
3.- Calculation of the dynamos
REAL mode (continuous or transient analysis). 12.- Comparative analysis of
SIMULATED mode. speed constant.
the response response of
The unit consists mainly of an interface for the conditioning of input and output signals. 4.- Obtaining of the transient the gate real motor vs the
For its part, this one will be connected to the computer (through a SCSI wire and a data responses of the gate response of the gate
acquisition board) and to the two subsystems that we try to control: motor. simulated motor for
Gate subsystem.
5.- Obtaining of the transient continuous control signals.
Turbine-generator subsystem.
The unit has (in the interface) some switches to establish different loads to the generator output response of the turbine 13.- Comparative analysis of the
and different conditions of the real system. motor. response of the gate real
Gate subsystem: motor vs the response of the
6.- Obtaining of the transient
It consists of a motor that controls the gate opening, and some mechanisms that gate simulated motor for
response of the gate
emulate it. sinusoidal control signals.
Turbine-generator system: simulated motor.
This subsystem will be analyzed separately or linked up with the 14.- Comparative analysis of the
7.- Obtaining of the transient response of the gate real
6.- Systems & Automatics
previous one, achieving that the motor that simulates the turbine turns according to the
response of the turbine motor vs the response
gate opening percentage.
simulated motor.
This turbine is connected with a generator system and with a system that simulates different of the gate simulated motor
loads (inductive, capacitive or resistive). 8.- C o m p a r a t i v e a n a l y s i s for square control signals.
Three loads in parallel are connected at the generator output, that simulate the between the responses
consumption of the energy distribution system: Variable resistance. Capacitance. of the practices 4,5,6, 15.- Comparative analysis of the
Inductance. and 7. response of the gate real
Control interface. motor vs the response of the
2 SCE/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
9.- Comparative analysis of gate simulated motor for
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage the transient response of triangular control signals.
of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second guaranteed. It allows the the turbine real motor vs
registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. the transient response of
This Software has got 2 operating modes: the simulated motor for
REAL mode: through motors, actuators and sensors that the unit includes (Continuous, resistive load.
transient). 10.-Comparative analysis of
SIMULATED mode: through the mathematical modelization of the motors, previously the transient response of the
mentioned.
turbine real motor v s t h e
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. transient response of the
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 500x450x200 mm. Weight: 25 Kg. simulated motor for
capacitive load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/
systems/SCE.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SBB. Ball and Beam System
Unit for the study of the stabilization of a naturally unstable system, and
control of the position of the ball.
The system allows to place a ball moving along a guide, oscillating from the
central point, at any desired point of the guide.
Self-contained unit with direct connection to the main, and with interface
with other systems through terminals, to connect the inputs and outputs.
All power and electronics measurements inside de unit.
Possibility to use an analogical or digital controller.
The unit includes:
DC motor with gear box, and armature controlled, that alllows the
oscillating movement of the guide adjusted to the motor axis.
Rod with guide for ball displacement and Ball.
Ball position sensor in the guide, rod inclination angle (potentiometer) and
motor speed (tachometric dynamo).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/automationsystems/systems/SBB.pdf
CPVM. DC Motor Position and Speed Control
Page 84
issue:01/11
AUTOMATION (REGULATION AND CONTROL) MODULE
Ref: 0651 1 / 1
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 RYC TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION 1
AND CONTROL, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
RYC.Unit TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION 1
AND CONTROL INCLUDING THE CONTROL INTERFACE
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
RYC/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF REGULATION AND CONTROL
2 RYC/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
REGULATION AND CONTROL (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
3 0651PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
4 0651PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
5 0651IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP 1
6 0651CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
7 0651TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
8 0651MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.3- Regulation and Control
RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
4 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
1 Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation 5 Manuals
and Control, including Control Interface
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1 RYC Unit: 1.- S t u d y i n o p e n l o o p N º 1 :
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Proportional Block.
Steel box. 2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative
Block.
3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple
2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier. Module of Inverter Reductor.
pole.
Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: Second
Module of Hysteresis. Module of Limiter. order plants.
Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding. 5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non-linear
14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF. 6 Diodes.
34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers. 6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks
186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. Composition: Negative Zero and
On/Off switch. Fuse. Negative Pole.
Connector to PC. Control Interface. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
means of Quantitative Optimum 1st
order system.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
6.- Systems & Automatics
means of Quantitative Optimum 2nd
3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
order system
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and Other practical possibilities:
multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process parameters.
Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
9.- First order filter.
Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
10.-Integral regulator.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
in the feedback.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/automationsystems/automationregulation/RYC.pdf
Page 88
issue:01/11
AUTOMATION (CONTROL) MODULE
Ref: 0652 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 UCP COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1
(WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
UCP-UB BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS 1
CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
UCP/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
UCP/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
, SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
UCP-T SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-C SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-N SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-PA SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-pH SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-CT SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL 1
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
2 UCP/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
3 UCP-P PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF 1
PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
UCP-P.Unit PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF 1
PRESSURE (AIR)
UCP-P/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
UCP-P/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
4 UCP-P/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
5 CECI INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS TRAINER 1
6 CECI/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS TRAINER (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
7 CRCI INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING 1
8 CRCI/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
9 CEAB TRAINER FOR FIELDS BUS APPLICATION 1
Ref: 0652 2 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
10 CEAB/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
TRAINER FOR FIELD BUS APPLICATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
11 CEAC CONTROLLER TURNING TRAINER 1
12 CEAC/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
CONTROLLER TURNING TRAINER (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
13 EPID/T INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING 1
14 EPID/T/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
INDUSTRIAL REGULATION TRAINER, PID TYPE
(TEMPERATURE) (RESULTS AND CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
15 0652PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
16 0652PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
17 0652IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP 1
18 0652CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
19 0652TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
20 0652MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
.
UCP Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCP-UB. Base Unit Board Software for each
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T. 4.2 UCP-C. 4.3 UCP-N. 4.4 UCP-PA. 4.5UCP-PH. 4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCP-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
several sets. 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
10.- Process Control
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
Inputs/Outputs. 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 39.- pH control loops (P).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
Turbine type flow sensor. 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control: 45.- pH sensor calibration.
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
Pressure sensor. 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control: 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 90
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
UCPCN-UB. Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
Board Software for each
Base Unit Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T. 4.2UCPCN-C. 4.3UCPCN-N. 4.4 UCPCN-PA. 4.5 UCPCN-PH. 4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
10.- Process Control
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Inputs/Outputs. 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison pH Process Control:
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 39.- pH control loops (P).
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Turbine type flow sensor. 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control: 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Pressure sensor. 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control: 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Control: 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
Page 91 www.edibon.com
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCPCV-UB. Board Software for each
Base Unit 5 Cables and Accessories Set for Process
Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T. 4.2 UCPCV-C. 4.3UCPCV-N. 4.4UCPCV-PA. 4.5UCPCV-PH. 4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box). 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
10.- Process Control
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 27.- Level sensor calibration.
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Pressure Process Control:
Inputs/Outputs. 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 39.- pH control loops (P).
Turbine type flow sensor. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control: 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 45.- pH sensor calibration.
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Pressure sensor. 46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process 52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control: 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 92
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them Incorrect Calibration:
and, if possible, solve them. 1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections: 2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
Faults affecting the sensors measure: 3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to 4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
calibrate the affected sensor through the Non Linearity:
values collection. 5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the 6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is 7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will 8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the Interchange of actuators:
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be 9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits. them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.) Reduction of an actuator response:
- Actuators canals interchange at any time 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
during the program execution. half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
This error does not admit any solution. the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog 50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
outputs, we can get an response with Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
a fraction of what it should be, either with a 11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...). AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
Faults in the controls execution: others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls. the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it (Affected sensor: pH).
should be ON is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
operating logic. 12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
response. sensor).
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the The action of some controls is annulled:
reduction or increase of the action really applied 13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
to the actuator, and the consequent control (Proportional-Derivative).
instability of the control. The student should notify 14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled. PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/ are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP .pdf
.
UCP-P Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2 3 4
10.- Process Control
Control Data Software for:
Interface Box Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
1 Unit: UCP-P Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
. 6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard 1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
1 .
UCP-P Unit: of different pressure sensor.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2.- Calibration processes.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
the hysteresis curve.
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
4.- I/P converter calibration.
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous type.
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real 6.- Determination of the influence of the
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered flow rate of the conduction.
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the 7.- Pressure control in conduction using
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, a PID controller.
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and 8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
the third one in the control software. 9.- Characteristics of a proportional
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: and integral control (P+I).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 10.- Characteristics of a proportional
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. and derivative control (P+D).
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
PID controller.
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
PID controller, flow control.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 5 Kg.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 93 www.edibon.com
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial To study methods and terminology of
process controller. process control:
Steel box. 1.-Closed loop control.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. 2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. 3.-To study the step response.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on 4.-Reference variable step.
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V. To learn and to familiarise with a process
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2 controller:
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V. 5.-Configuration level.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process 6.-Parameter level.
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10. 7.-Operation control levels.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks . Control parameters:
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...). 8.-Setting input channels.
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables. 9.-Setting output channels.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 10.-To use computer (PC) - based
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 8 Kg. configuration tools.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 11.- Scaling displays.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system 1.- Function of a digital industrial
based on a simple application. controller.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation 2.- Layout of a field bus system.
of a industrial process controller. To learn and to familiarise with the
Steel box. operation and structure of a process
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface: control system under Profibus DP:
,
Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%. 3.- Controller parameter setting via field
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. bus system.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). 4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as 5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
analog signals at lab jacks . server function.
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software. 6.- Online controller parameters
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: setting.
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc). 7.- Master / slave assignment.
Set of cables. 8.- To configure and display alarms.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 9.- Reading control variables and
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg.
displaying them online.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 10.- Scaling displays.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf 11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP . 1.- Operation and function of a digital
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or industrial controller.
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a 2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
Profibus DP interface (master). module.
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology, 3.- Function of a digital input/output
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc. module.
Steel box. 4.- Layout of a field bus system.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface: 5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
,
Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
10.- Process Control
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. stations.
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V. 6.- Defining the bus technology with the
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital stations.
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog 7.- Reading out and in, and online
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V. displaying of analog and digital
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). process variables.
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and 8.- Communication protocols.
process control software. 9.- To define tags.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: 10.- Familiarisation with the device
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables. master file “DMF”.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 11.- OPC server.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg. 12.- Access to the OPC database from
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ the process control program.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control 1.- To use commonly applied tuning
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response. rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be 2.- To study the difference between
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability, open and closed loop control.
disturbance and control response are demonstrated. 3.- Control loop comprising controller
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is and controlled system.
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can 4.- To determine the system parameters.
recorder and analyse the time response using the software. 5.- Closed-loop control system
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer response.
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data 6.- Choice of optimum controller
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box. parameters.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface: 7.- Stability, steady state and transient
,
Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%. response.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. 8.- Study and investigation of control
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC). and disturbance response.
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with 9.- Study of the stability of the closed
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response, control loop.
non-linearity and limitation. 10.- Learning methods and terminology
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of involved in process control.
time response on computer (PC). 11.- To adapt the process controller to
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. different controlled systems.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg. 12.- Use and practices with the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ simulation software.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 94
Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
(6AD)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 2
1000. Process Control
1010: Process Control. Basic Module.
1010/PLC: PLC's Module
1011: Process Control. Medium Module
1011/PLC: PLC's Module
1020: Industrial Process Module
1020/PLC: PLC's Module
1000/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Process Control units
Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.BASIC MODULE
Ref: 1010 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 UCP COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1
(WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
UCP-UB BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS 1
CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
UCP/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
UCP/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
, SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
UCP-T SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-C SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-N SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-PA SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-pH SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCP-CT SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL 1
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
2 UCP/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
3 1010PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
4 1010PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
5 1010IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
6 1010CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
7 1010TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
8 1010MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 1010 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
.
UCP Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCP-UB. Base Unit Board Software for each
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T. 4.2 UCP-C. 4.3 UCP-N. 4.4 UCP-PA. 4.5UCP-PH. 4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCP-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
several sets. 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
10.- Process Control
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
Inputs/Outputs. 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 39.- pH control loops (P).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
Turbine type flow sensor. 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control: 45.- pH sensor calibration.
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
Pressure sensor. 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control: 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 61 www.edibon.com
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
UCPCN-UB. Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
Board Software for each
Base Unit Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T. 4.2UCPCN-C. 4.3UCPCN-N. 4.4 UCPCN-PA. 4.5 UCPCN-PH. 4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
10.- Process Control
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Inputs/Outputs. 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison pH Process Control:
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 39.- pH control loops (P).
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Turbine type flow sensor. 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control: 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Pressure sensor. 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control: 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Control: 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
Page 62
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCPCV-UB. Board Software for each
Base Unit 5 Cables and Accessories Set for Process
Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T. 4.2 UCPCV-C. 4.3UCPCV-N. 4.4UCPCV-PA. 4.5UCPCV-PH. 4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box). 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
10.- Process Control
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 27.- Level sensor calibration.
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Pressure Process Control:
Inputs/Outputs. 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 39.- pH control loops (P).
Turbine type flow sensor. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control: 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 45.- pH sensor calibration.
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Pressure sensor. 46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process 52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control: 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63 www.edibon.com
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them Incorrect Calibration:
and, if possible, solve them. 1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections: 2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
Faults affecting the sensors measure: 3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to 4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
calibrate the affected sensor through the Non Linearity:
values collection. 5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the 6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is 7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will 8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the Interchange of actuators:
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be 9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits. them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.) Reduction of an actuator response:
- Actuators canals interchange at any time 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
during the program execution. half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
This error does not admit any solution. the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog 50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
outputs, we can get an response with Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
a fraction of what it should be, either with a 11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...). AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
Faults in the controls execution: others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls. the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it (Affected sensor: pH).
should be ON is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
operating logic. 12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
response. sensor).
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the The action of some controls is annulled:
reduction or increase of the action really applied 13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
to the actuator, and the consequent control (Proportional-Derivative).
instability of the control. The student should notify 14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled. PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/ are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP .pdf
.
UCP-P Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3 4
10.- Process Control
2
Control Data Software for:
Interface Box Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
1 Unit: UCP-P Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
. 6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard 1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
1 .
UCP-P Unit: of different pressure sensor.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2.- Calibration processes.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
the hysteresis curve.
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
4.- I/P converter calibration.
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous type.
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real 6.- Determination of the influence of the
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered flow rate of the conduction.
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the 7.- Pressure control in conduction using
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, a PID controller.
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and 8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
the third one in the control software. 9.- Characteristics of a proportional
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: and integral control (P+I).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 10.- Characteristics of a proportional
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. and derivative control (P+D).
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
PID controller.
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
PID controller, flow control.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial To study methods and terminology of
process controller. process control:
Steel box. 1.-Closed loop control.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. 2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. 3.-To study the step response.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on 4.-Reference variable step.
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V. To learn and to familiarise with a process
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2 controller:
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V. 5.-Configuration level.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process 6.-Parameter level.
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10. 7.-Operation control levels.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks . Control parameters:
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...). 8.-Setting input channels.
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables. 9.-Setting output channels.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 10.-To use computer (PC) - based
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 8 Kg. configuration tools.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 11.- Scaling displays.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system 1.- Function of a digital industrial
based on a simple application. controller.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation 2.- Layout of a field bus system.
of a industrial process controller. To learn and to familiarise with the
Steel box. operation and structure of a process
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface: control system under Profibus DP:
,
Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%. 3.- Controller parameter setting via field
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. bus system.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). 4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as 5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
analog signals at lab jacks . server function.
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software. 6.- Online controller parameters
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: setting.
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc). 7.- Master / slave assignment.
Set of cables. 8.- To configure and display alarms.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 9.- Reading control variables and
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg.
displaying them online.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ 10.- Scaling displays.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf 11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP . 1.- Operation and function of a digital
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or industrial controller.
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a 2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
Profibus DP interface (master). module.
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology, 3.- Function of a digital input/output
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc. module.
Steel box. 4.- Layout of a field bus system.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface: 5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
,
Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s. stations.
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V. 6.- Defining the bus technology with the
10.- Process Control
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital stations.
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog 7.- Reading out and in, and online
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V. displaying of analog and digital
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC). process variables.
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and 8.- Communication protocols.
process control software. 9.- To define tags.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example: 10.- Familiarisation with the device
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables. master file “DMF”.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 11.- OPC server.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm. Weight : 12 Kg. 12.- Access to the OPC database from
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ the process control program.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control 1.- To use commonly applied tuning
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response. rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be 2.- To study the difference between
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability, open and closed loop control.
disturbance and control response are demonstrated. 3.- Control loop comprising controller
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is and controlled system.
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can 4.- To determine the system parameters.
recorder and analyse the time response using the software. 5.- Closed-loop control system
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer response.
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data 6.- Choice of optimum controller
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box. parameters.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface: 7.- Stability, steady state and transient
,
Configurable as P PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%. response.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s. 8.- Study and investigation of control
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC). and disturbance response.
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with 9.- Study of the stability of the closed
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response, control loop.
non-linearity and limitation. 10.- Learning methods and terminology
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of involved in process control.
time response on computer (PC). 11.- To adapt the process controller to
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. different controlled systems.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg. 12.- Use and practices with the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ simulation software.
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 65 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1010/PLC 1 / 1
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLC-PI PLC MODULE 1
UCP/PLC-SOF PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
2 1010PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
3 1010PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
4 1010IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
5 1010CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
6 1010TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
7 1010MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1 PLC-PI Unit: 1.- Control of theparticular unit 9.- PLC process application for the
process through the control particular unit.
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a interface box without the 10.- PLC structure.
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, computer. 11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the 2.- PID control. configuration.
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON 3.- Visualization of all the sensors 12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
Computerized Teaching Unit). values used in the particular 13.- PLC program languages.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. unit process. 14.- PLC different programming
Front panel: 4.- Calibration of all sensors standard languages (ladder
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs. included in the particular unit diagram (LD), structured text
process. (ST), instructions list (IL),
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs. 5.- Hand on of all the actuators sequential function chart
Touch screen. involved in the particular unit (SFC), function block diagram
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC process. (FBD)).
Inside: 6.- Realization of different 15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable. experiments, in automatic way, development of new process.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program without having in front the 16.- Hand on an established process.
particular unit. (These 17.- To visualize and see the results
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control. experiments can be decided
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. previously). and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC). 7.- Simulation of outside actions, 18.- Possibility of creating new
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software: in the cases do not exist process in relation with the
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit. hardware elements. (Example: particular unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
test of complementary tanks, 19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. environment to the process to 20.- Own PLC applications in
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. be studied, etc). accordance with teacher and
8.- PLC hardware general use. student requirements.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
6.- Systems & Automatics
2 3
PLC PLCE
Programming Touch Screen
Software Programming Software
1 Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard Using the PLC Programing Software:
1 PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple 1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, The programs can be written in several programming languages:
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. Function block diagram. (FBD).
Front panel: 2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push 3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of 4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital 5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass 6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
connections (GND). Touch screen. established in a variable.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC). 7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
Inside: 8.- How to use analog inputs.
Power supply 100... 240V (AC). 9.- How to use analog outputs.
Panasonic PLC: 10.- Use of temporizers.
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32 11.- Logic functions implementation.
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control. 12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. 13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming. 14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
2 PLC Programming Software: 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages 16.- Functions library.
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential 17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration, 18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words, * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
function blocks, inputs/outputs... Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers, 20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC 21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software words).
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions 22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse 23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
of programs is easy. 24.- Switching from one screen to another.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software: * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy Other practical possibilities:
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
Editor. causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. happens in the outputs.
4 -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx. (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ output, (for example: a pump).
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.MEDIUM MODULE
Ref: 1011 1 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 UCP-P PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF 1
PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
UCP-P.Unit PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF 1
PRESSURE (AIR)
UCP-P/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
UCP-P/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
2 UCP-P/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
3 UCPCN COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1
(WITH PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
UCPCN-UB BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALLA SETS FOR CONTROL 1
TYPE "UCPCN"
UCPCN/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER 1
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
UCPCN/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH PNEUMATIC
CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
, SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL 1
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
UCPCN-T SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCN-C SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCN-N SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCN-PA SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCN-PH SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCN-CT SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL 1
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
4 UCPCV COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 1
(WITH SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL
OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
UCPCV-UB BASE UNIT (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS 1
CONTROL TYPE"UCPCV"
Ref: 1011 2 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
4 UCPCV/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR COMPUTER 1
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
UCPCV/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER CONTROLLED
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH SPEED
CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
, SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL 1
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
UCPCV-T SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCV-C SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCV-N SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCV-PA SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCV-PH SET FOR PH PROCESS CONTROL 1
UCPCV-CT SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL 1
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
5 UCPCV/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH SPEED CONTROLLER)FOR PROCESS CONTROL
OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
6 1011PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
7 1011PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
8 1011IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
9 1011CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
10 1011TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
11 1011MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 1011 3 / 3
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them Incorrect Calibration:
and, if possible, solve them. 1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections: 2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
Faults affecting the sensors measure: 3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to 4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
calibrate the affected sensor through the Non Linearity:
values collection. 5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the 6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is 7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will 8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the Interchange of actuators:
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be 9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits. them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.) Reduction of an actuator response:
- Actuators canals interchange at any time 10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
during the program execution. half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
This error does not admit any solution. the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog 50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
outputs, we can get an response with Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
a fraction of what it should be, either with a 11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...). AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
Faults in the controls execution: others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls. the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it (Affected sensor: pH).
should be ON is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
operating logic. 12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
response. sensor).
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the The action of some controls is annulled:
reduction or increase of the action really applied 13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
to the actuator, and the consequent control (Proportional-Derivative).
instability of the control. The student should notify 14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled. PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/ are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP .pdf
.
UCP-P Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
3 4
10.- Process Control
2
Control Data Software for:
Interface Box Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
1 Unit: UCP-P Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
. 6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard 1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
1 .
UCP-P Unit: of different pressure sensor.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2.- Calibration processes.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
the hysteresis curve.
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
4.- I/P converter calibration.
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous type.
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real 6.- Determination of the influence of the
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered flow rate of the conduction.
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the 7.- Pressure control in conduction using
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, a PID controller.
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and 8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
the third one in the control software. 9.- Characteristics of a proportional
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: and integral control (P+I).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 10.- Characteristics of a proportional
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. and derivative control (P+D).
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
PID controller.
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
PID controller, flow control.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
UCPCN-UB. Control Interface BoxData Acquisition Computer Control
Board Software for each
Base Unit Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T. 4.2UCPCN-C. 4.3UCPCN-N. 4.4 UCPCN-PA. 4.5 UCPCN-PH. 4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve. 12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
10.- Process Control
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Pressure Process Control:
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
Inputs/Outputs. 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison pH Process Control:
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows 37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 39.- pH control loops (P).
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Turbine type flow sensor. 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control: 43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Pressure sensor. 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control: 49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
Control: 54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
Page 62
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals (continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1 2 3 ( )
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Control Interface Box
UCPCV-UB. Board Software for each
Base Unit 5 Cables and Accessories Set for Process
Control
6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements Sensor and elements
+ + + + + +
Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control Computer Control
Software for Software for Flow Software for Level Software for Software for pH Software for Conductivity
Temperature Process Process Control ( ) Process Control ( ) Pressure Process Process Control ( ) and TDS
Control ( ) Control ( ) Process Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T. 4.2 UCPCV-C. 4.3UCPCV-N. 4.4UCPCV-PA. 4.5UCPCV-PH. 4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Temperature Set for Flow Set for Level Set for Pressure Set for PH Set for Conductivity
Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control Process Control and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters: Temperature Process Control:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit: 1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with 2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
one or several sets. 3.- Temperature control loops (P).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that 4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central 5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank 7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the 8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass. 9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and Flow Process Control:
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage 10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box). 11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box : 13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one 14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
or several sets. 15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently 16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in 17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves 18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the 19.- Level control loops (Manual).
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID 20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
10.- Process Control
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at 21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time 22.- Level control loops (P+I).
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in 23.- Level control loops (P+D).
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software. 24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 27.- Level sensor calibration.
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Pressure Process Control:
Inputs/Outputs. 28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit: 29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working) 30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control: 32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level 33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor). 34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control: 35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison 36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. 38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control: 39.- pH control loops (P).
Turbine type flow sensor. 40.- pH control loops (P+I).
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#) 41.- pH control loops (P+D).
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control: 42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA). 44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#). 45.- pH sensor calibration.
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control: Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Pressure sensor. 46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#). 47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
pH sensor. Helix agitator. 50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#). 51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process 52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control: 53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor. 55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#). 56.- TDS control loops (P).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg. 59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ 63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1011/PLC 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLC-PI PLC MODULE 1
UCP-P/PLC-SOF PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
2 PLC-PI PLC MODULE 1
UCPCN/PLC-SOF PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER 1
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED
SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
3 PLC-PI PLC MODULE 1
UCPCV/PLC-SOF PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR COMPUTER 1
CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER) FOR PROCESS CONTROL OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS,
FORMED BY:
4 1011PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
5 1011PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
6 1011IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
7 1011CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
8 1011TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
9 1011MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 1011/PLC 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1 PLC-PI Unit: 1.- Control of theparticular unit 9.- PLC process application for the
process through the control particular unit.
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a interface box without the 10.- PLC structure.
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, computer. 11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the 2.- PID control. configuration.
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON 3.- Visualization of all the sensors 12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
Computerized Teaching Unit). values used in the particular 13.- PLC program languages.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. unit process. 14.- PLC different programming
Front panel: 4.- Calibration of all sensors standard languages (ladder
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs. included in the particular unit diagram (LD), structured text
process. (ST), instructions list (IL),
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs. 5.- Hand on of all the actuators sequential function chart
Touch screen. involved in the particular unit (SFC), function block diagram
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC process. (FBD)).
Inside: 6.- Realization of different 15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable. experiments, in automatic way, development of new process.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program without having in front the 16.- Hand on an established process.
particular unit. (These 17.- To visualize and see the results
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control. experiments can be decided
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. previously). and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC). 7.- Simulation of outside actions, 18.- Possibility of creating new
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software: in the cases do not exist process in relation with the
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit. hardware elements. (Example: particular unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
test of complementary tanks, 19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. environment to the process to 20.- Own PLC applications in
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. be studied, etc). accordance with teacher and
8.- PLC hardware general use. student requirements.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
6.- Systems & Automatics
2 3
PLC PLCE
Programming Touch Screen
Software Programming Software
1 Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard Using the PLC Programing Software:
1 PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple 1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, The programs can be written in several programming languages:
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. Function block diagram. (FBD).
Front panel: 2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push 3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of 4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital 5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass 6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
connections (GND). Touch screen. established in a variable.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC). 7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
Inside: 8.- How to use analog inputs.
Power supply 100... 240V (AC). 9.- How to use analog outputs.
Panasonic PLC: 10.- Use of temporizers.
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32 11.- Logic functions implementation.
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control. 12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. 13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming. 14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
2 PLC Programming Software: 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages 16.- Functions library.
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential 17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration, 18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words, * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
function blocks, inputs/outputs... Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers, 20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC 21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software words).
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions 22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse 23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
of programs is easy. 24.- Switching from one screen to another.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software: * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy Other practical possibilities:
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
Editor. causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. happens in the outputs.
4 -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx. (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ output, (for example: a pump).
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
INDUSTRIAL PROCESS MODULE
Ref: 1020 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 CPIC PROCESS CONTROL PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL 1
INSTRUMENTATION AND SERVICE MODULE,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED (FLOW, TEMPERATURE,
LEVEL AND PRESSURE). FORMED BY:
CPIC.Unit PROCESS CONTROL PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL 1
INSTRUMENTATION AND SERVICE MODULE
CPIC/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL 1
PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND
SERVICE MODULE (FLOW, TEMPERATURE, LEVEL
AND PRESSURE)
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
CPIC/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND
SERVICE MODULE (FLOW, TEMPERATURE, LEVEL
AND PRESSURE)
2 CPIC/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
PROCESS CONTROL PLANT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
3 SCD DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 1
4 1020PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
5 1020PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
6 1020IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
7 1020CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
8 1020MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
9 1020TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
Ref: 1020 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.2- Industrial Process Control
CPIC. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module
(Flow, Temperature, Level and Pressure)
Always included
Main Unit in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
Service Module used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2 3 4
Control Data Software for:
Interface Box Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
1 Unit: CPIC. Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
Service Module. (Flow, Temperature, Level and Pressure).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1CPIC. Unit: 1.- Familiarisation with the different 29.- Level control loop (P+D).
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar components of the system and 30.- Level control loop (P+I+D).
distribution that the elements in the real unit. Main metallic elements in their symbolic representation. 31.- Adjust of level controller constants
Identification of components and (minimum area or reduction rate).
stainless steel.
description of their functions. 32.- Adjust of level controller constants
Main Unit contains the following elements:
2.- The auxiliary systems: air and hot (minimum disturbance criterion).
2 pneumatics valves with Cv : 0.25. I/P actuator of 0.2 to 1.0 bar
water supply. 33.- Adjust of level controller constants
for one electric signal of 4 to 20 mA. 2 motorised valves with 3.- Flow Sensors calibration. (minimum width criterion)
2000N. 12 solenoid valves, normally closed. 2 solenoid 4.- Temperature sensors calibration. 34.- Search of simple shortcomings in level
valves, normally opened. 5.- Level sensors calibration. control loop.
3 differential pressure sensors; 2 of them with range of 0-1000 mm 6.- Pressure sensors calibration. 35.- Pressure control loop (on/off).
H2O, and the other one with 0-10 bar. 5 temperature sensors. 7.- Flow control loop (on/off). 36.- Pressure control loop (proportional).
1 level sensor. 4 level switches. 1 water pump, with 7 bar of 8.- Flow control loop (proportional). 37.- Pressure control loop (P+I).
maximum pressure and 106 l/min. of maximum water flow. 9.- Flow control loop (P+I). 38.- Pressure control loop (P+D).
Service Module contains the following elements: 10. Flow control loop (P+D). 39.- Pressure control loop (P+I+D).
Compressor unit with 10 bar as maximum pressure. Water heater with 11.- Flow control loop (P+I+D). 40.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
80 l. as maximum capacity. Electrical resistance of 1.2 KW. Water 12.- Adjust of flow controller constants (minimum area or reduction rate).
supply system: Water tank with capacity for 400 litres, water pump with (Ziegler-Nichols). 41.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
3.0 bar and 2500 l/h. 13.- Adjust of flow controller constants (minimum disturbance criterion).
2 CPIC/CIB. Control Interface Box : (reaction curves). 42.- Adjust of pressure controller constants
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are 14.- Search of simple shortcomings in the (minimum width criterion).
permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of loop of flow control. 43.- Search of simple shortcomings in the
all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in 15.- Temperature control loop (on/off). pressure control loop.
the process. Real time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can 16.- Tem p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l l o o p 44.- The use of the controllers in cascade,
be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to (proportional). exemplified with the level/flow control
avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of 17.- Temperature control loop (P+I). loop.
modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at any moment 18.- Temperature control loop (P+D). 45.- Adjust of cascade control constants
10.- Process Control
during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and 19.- Te m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l l o o p (minimum area or reduction rate).
in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: (P+I+D). 46.- Adjust of cascade control constants
mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface and the third one in the 20.- Adjust of temperature controller (minimum disturbance criterion).
control software. constants (minimum area or 47.- Adjust of cascade control constants
reduction rate). (minimum width criterion).
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
21.- Adjust of temperature controller 48.- Search of simple shortcomings in
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a
constants (minimum disturbance cascade control loop.
computer slot. 16 analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog
criterion ). 49.- Practical operation of the control plant
outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
22.- Adjust of temperature controller to some wanted specific values:
4 C P I C / C C S O F. C o m p u t e r C o n t r o l + D a t a A c q u i s i t i o n + D a t a
constants (minimum width transfers without interferences.
Management Software: criterion). 50.- Starting-up and operation of the plant
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, 23.- S t u d y o f t h e r e t a r d s f o r WITHOUT supervision.
comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 speed/distance, exemplified 51-69.- Practices with PLC.
data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state through the temperature control
and the graphic representation in real time. loop.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 24.- Study of the energy lost in the
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. temperature control loop.
Dimensions (approx.)= 25.- Search of simple shortcomings in
-Main Unit: 5000x1500x2500 mm. Weight:1000 Kg. temperature control loop.
-Service Module: 2000x1500x2000 mm. Weight:200 Kg. 26.- Level control loop (on/off).
-Control Interface: 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 20 Kg. 27.- Level control loop (proportional).
28.- Level control loop (P+I).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/industrial/CPIC.pdf
Other available units
CPIC-C. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Flow).
CPIC-T. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Temperature).
CPIC-N. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Level).
CPIC-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Plant with Industrial Instrumentation and Service Module (only Pressure).
Page 66
issue:01/11
PLC´s MODULE
Ref: 1020/PLC 1 / 1
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 PLC-PI PLC MODULE 1
CPIC/PLC-SOF PLC CONTROL SOFTWARE FOR FOR PROCESS 1
CONTROL PLANT WITH INDUSTRIAL
INSTRUMENTATION AND SERVICE MODULE (FLOW,
TEMPERATURE, LEVEL AND PRESSURE).
2 1020PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
3 1020PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
4 1020IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
5 1020CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
6 1020MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
7 1020TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1 PLC-PI Unit: 1.- Control of theparticular unit 9.- PLC process application for the
process through the control particular unit.
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a interface box without the 10.- PLC structure.
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, computer. 11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the 2.- PID control. configuration.
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON 3.- Visualization of all the sensors 12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
Computerized Teaching Unit). values used in the particular 13.- PLC program languages.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. unit process. 14.- PLC different programming
Front panel: 4.- Calibration of all sensors standard languages (ladder
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs. included in the particular unit diagram (LD), structured text
process. (ST), instructions list (IL),
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs. 5.- Hand on of all the actuators sequential function chart
Touch screen. involved in the particular unit (SFC), function block diagram
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC process. (FBD)).
Inside: 6.- Realization of different 15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable. experiments, in automatic way, development of new process.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program without having in front the 16.- Hand on an established process.
particular unit. (These 17.- To visualize and see the results
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control. experiments can be decided
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. previously). and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC). 7.- Simulation of outside actions, 18.- Possibility of creating new
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software: in the cases do not exist process in relation with the
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit. hardware elements. (Example: particular unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
test of complementary tanks, 19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. environment to the process to 20.- Own PLC applications in
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. be studied, etc). accordance with teacher and
8.- PLC hardware general use. student requirements.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
6.- Systems & Automatics
2 3
PLC PLCE
Programming Touch Screen
Software Programming Software
1 Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard Using the PLC Programing Software:
1 PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple 1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and, The programs can be written in several programming languages:
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel. Function block diagram. (FBD).
Front panel: 2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push 3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of 4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital 5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass 6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
connections (GND). Touch screen. established in a variable.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC). 7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
Inside: 8.- How to use analog inputs.
Power supply 100... 240V (AC). 9.- How to use analog outputs.
Panasonic PLC: 10.- Use of temporizers.
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32 11.- Logic functions implementation.
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control. 12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules. 13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming. 14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
2 PLC Programming Software: 15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages 16.- Functions library.
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential 17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration, 18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words, * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
function blocks, inputs/outputs... Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal 19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers, 20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC 21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software words).
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions 22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse 23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
of programs is easy. 24.- Switching from one screen to another.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software: * Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy Other practical possibilities:
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps -It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
Editor. causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. happens in the outputs.
4 -It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx. (for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/ output, (for example: a pump).
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85 www.edibon.com
Advanced Automation and Systems Laboratory
(6AD)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 3
0200. Electronics
0213-210/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0213-211/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL).
0230: Transducers and Sensors Module
0231: Sensors Instrumentation
0240: Control Electronics Module
0400. Electricity
0413-410/10S: Domestic Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0413-411/10S: Domestic Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref.:6AD-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-210/10S 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
LIEBA BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1 EBC-100 BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY 1
2 M1 D. C. CIRCUITS MODULE 1
3 M1/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C 10
CIRCUITS
4 M1/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C. 10
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
5 M2 A. C. CIRCUITS MODULE 1
6 M2/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF A.C. 10
CIRCUITS
7 M2/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A.C. 10
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
8 M16 ELECTRICS NETWORKS MODULE 1
9 M16/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
ELECTRIC NETWORKS
10 M16/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
ELECTRICS NETWORKS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
11 M17 ELECTROMAGNETISM MODULE 1
12 M17/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
ELECTROMAGNETISM
13 M17/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
ELECTROMAGNETISM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
14 M3 SEMICONDUCTORS I MODULE 1
15 M3/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
SEMICONDUCTORS I
16 M3/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
SEMICONDUCTORS I (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
17 M5 POWER SUPPLIES MODULE 1
18 M5/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
POWER SUPPLIES
19 M5/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER 10
SUPPLIES (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
21 INS/SOF CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE 1
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
22 EDAS/VIS-0.25 EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL 1
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIS VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope, 1
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DAIB DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX 1
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
Ref: 0213-210/10S 2 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
22 EDAS/SOF DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE 1
23 0210PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
24 0210PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
25 0210IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
26 0210CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
27 0210TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
28 0210MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.- Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2 Modules 1 Power Supply 2 Modules
(power supply needed) FA-CO (power supply needed)
(M1) (M9)
(M2) (M10)
or
EBC-100
(M16) (M11)
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
(M17) Technique (M12)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
+
(M3) (M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(M4) 4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M5) (M15)
(M31)
(M6)
5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used (M60)
(M7) Teaching
Technique
DAIB. Data acquisition interface box
(M8) (M65)
DAB. Data acquisition board
EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Other modules Software Expansion Board (M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity: " M14. Optoelectronics. Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits. " M15. Development Module. " M99. Expansion Board.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers: Some electronic sub-boards available:
" M16. Electric Networks. " M41. Resistance Transducers. "M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
" M17. Electromagnetism. " M43. Applications of Temperature. "M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
Basic Electronics: " M44. Applications of Light. "M99-3. Function Generator.
" M3. Semiconductors I. " M45. Linear Position and Force. "M99-4. AM Modulator.
" M4. Semiconductors II. " M46. Environmental Measurements. "M99-5. AM Demodulator.
" M5. Power Supplies. " M47. Rotational Speed & Position
" M6. Oscillators. Control. * We can develop any electronic sub-board
" M7. Operational Amplifiers. " M48. Sounds Measurements. according to the application required by
" M8. Filters. " M49. Applications of Temperature and the customer.
" M9. Power Electronics. Pressure.
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters. Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals. " M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits. " M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits. " M65. Control and Regulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
1 Power Supply
Electronics
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2 Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Measurement managing and checking 10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit. 18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
instruments: 11.-Theoretical / practical exercises. Bridge circuit.
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation. Resistors association and the Wheatstone 19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Use of multimeter. Bridge: Kirchoff's laws:
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit. 12.-Voltage and current measurement 20.- Kirchoff's first law.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit. in a circuit with resistors connected 21.- Kirchoff's second law.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises. in series. 22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
Ohm's Law: 13.-Series/Parallel configuration study. 23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
5.-Ohm's Law verification. 14.-The Wheatstone Bridge. Additional Possibilities:
6.-Power calculation. 15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors Voltage/Current dividers.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises. circuit. Batteries and Switches.
Resistors: characteristics and types: 16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors Power source in series and parallel.
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code. circuit. The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
Ohmmeter. 17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit. Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Alternating signal characteristics. with the frequency. RLC Circuits:
Instruments: 14.-Study of faults in capacitors. 30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
1.- Waveforms study in A.C. 15.-Reactive capacitance variations with 31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the the capacitance. and High- Pass filters.
Wave form circuit. 16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel. 32.- Exercises.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform 17.-A.C. capacitors in series. Resonance:
circuit. 18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers. 33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
4.- Relation between peak values and 19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit. impedance source.
RMS for sinusoidal waves. 20.-Inductive reactance variations with 34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal the inductance. 35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
alternating current. 21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit. Circuit.
6.-Measurements using the 22.-Exercises. 36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
oscilloscope. Basic theorems and capacitance and impedance source.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles inductance circuits: 37.- Circuit frequency response and
for resistors in sinusoidal 23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in bandwidth.
alternating current. series. 38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series. 24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in 39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel. parallel. circuit.
10.- Exercises. 25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in 40.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors: series. The transformer:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform 26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3. 41.- The transformer.
and sinusoidal input current. 27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3. 42.- The transformer with load.
12.- Inductance with square waveform 28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in 43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
and a sinusoidal input voltage. parallel. 44.- Exercises.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations 29.-Exercises.
M16. Electric Networks PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Ohm’s law: 9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly. Star-triangle transformation:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance 10.-DC+AC assembly. 17.- Resistance measurement between
of a continuous source. 11.-Theoretical/practical exercises. terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance. Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems: 18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an 12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent Wheatstone bridge:
alternating source. circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws. 19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises. fed by a DC source.
Electrical power: 13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to Superposition theorem: 20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
load. 14.-Application of the Superposition circuit.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC theorem. 21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
source. 15.-Error study in the Superposition by an AC source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises. circuit. Component values 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination: modifications. Additional Possibilities:
8.-DC+DC assembly. 16.-Theoretical/practical exercises. Millman’s Theorem.
M17. Electromagnetism PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-Magnetic fields measurement. 8.- Basic operation of the solenoid. continuous current motor.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil 9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit. 15.- Motor used as DC generator.
Reactance calculation. 10.-Basic operation of a relay. 16.- Cemf.
3.-Exercises. 11.-Self-holding of the position of the 17.- Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications: contacts. Stepping Motor:
4.-Mutual Inductance. 12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit. 18.- Stepper motor working.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer 13.-Exercises. 19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
6.-Core effect in a transformer response. Direct current motor: 20.- Exercises.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer. 14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction: The Zener diode: 15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
1.- Study of the diode. 9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode. 16.- Exercises.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes. 10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit. Common emitter amplifier:
3.- Exercises. 11.- Exercises. 17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
The diode as a rectifier element: Study and characteristics of the transistor: amplifier.
4.- Half wave rectifier. 12.- Study of the transistor. 18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit. 13.- Study of the fault in the transistor. 19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
6.- Bridge rectifier. 14.- Exercises. amplifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier. Transistor characteristics operating as a 20.- Exercises.
8.- Exercises. switch:
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Complementary transistors pair: 7.- Exercises. Analog switch:
1.- Complementary transistors pair. Differential amplifier: 14.- Analog switch.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal. 8.- Differential amplifier. 15.- Exercises.
3.- Fault study of the complementary 9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier. Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
Transistor pair. 10.- Exercises. 16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
4.- Exercises. Study and characteristics of the JFET 17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
Darlington configuration: transistor: directly.
5.- Darlington configuration. 11.- JFET characteristics. 18.- Exercises.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington 12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
configuration. 13.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Rectification: 8.- Protection against overvoltages. 16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
1.- Rectification. 9.- Study of the fault “Protection against 17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
2.- Bridge rectifier. overcurrents”. 18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 10.- Theoretical/practical exercises. Introduction to switched power supplies:
Fixed voltage sources: Symmetrical voltage power sources: 19.- Switching technique.
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode. 11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator. 20.- Switching technique. PWM.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and 12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator. 21.- Switching technique. Boost.
Transistor. 13.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through Voltage regulators with integrated circuits: Additional Possibilities:
Zener and Transistor”. 14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317. Voltage Feedback.
7.- Protection against overcurrents. 15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317. DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets: 6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator. Astable multivibrator:
1.- RC net oscillator. 7.- Exercises. 12.- Astable multivibrator.
2.- LC net oscillator. Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator: 13.- Fault study with an Astable
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net 8.- Colpitts oscillator. mulltivibrator.
oscillators. 9.- Hartley oscillator. 14.- Exercises.
4.- Exercises. 555 TIMER:
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts 15.- 555 timer.
Wien bridge oscillator: Oscillator. 16.- 555 timer fault study.
5.- Wien Bridge. 11.- Exercises. 17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics: 8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier. 16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
1.- Operational amplifier study. 9.- Voltage follower. 17.- Exercises.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation 10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
voltage. Amplifier. 18.- Comparator study.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study. 11.- Exercises. 19.- Comparators fault study.
4.- Exercises. The adder amplifier: 20.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier: 12.- Adding amplifier study. Additional Possibilities:
5.- Inverting amplifier study. 13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier. Attenuator.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study. 14.- Exercises. Voltage Divider.
7.- Exercises. The differential amplifier: Open-loop operation.
The non-inverting amplifier: 15.- Differential amplifier study.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
RC and LC filter responses: 10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T. 18.- Study of Faults in filters.
1.- Frequency response. 11.- Exercises theoretical/practical. 19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
2.- Low-pass filter. Active filters: Association of filters:
3.- High-pass filter. 12.- Low-pass filter. 20.- Behaviour of the filter.
4.- LC Circuit. 13.- Low-pass filter with load and 21.- Filter of distorted signal.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter. operational amplifier. 22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
14.- High-pass filter. high pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter. 23.- Filter in parallel.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical. 15.- High-pass filter with load and 24.- Study of Error in filters.
T-shaped Filter: operational amplifier. 25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
8.- Filter with double T link. 16.- The attenuation is cumulative. Additional Possibilities:
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1. 17.- Use of Operational Amplifier. Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
M9. Power Electronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor: The thyristor: 11.- Study of insulation circuits.
1.-Study of the power transistor. 7.- Study of the thyristor. 12.- Exercises.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor. 8.- Study of the error of the thyristor. The TRIAC:
3.-Exercises. 9.- Exercises. 13.- Study of the TRIAC.
The MOSFET transistor: The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the 14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor. thyristor: 15.- Exercises.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET. 10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the Additional Possibilities:
6.-Exercises. thyristor. Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics (continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable 9.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
and monostable family: Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7- 18.- Triangular wave generation.
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch segments Displays: 19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
chip. 10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN A/D and D/A conversion:
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment 20.- D/A Converter.
Multiplexer. Display. 21.- A/D Converter.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog 11.- Error Study in the binary counter. 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Multiplexer. 12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D Applications:
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment 23.- Random number generator.
Integrated circuit. Display. 24.- Measuring the time between two
5.-Error Study in the bistable. 13.- Error Study in the BCD counter. events.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated 14.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
astable circuit. Comparators and analog integrators:
7.-Error Study in the astable. 15.- Characteristics of an analog Additional Possibilities:
8.-Characteristics of an integrated comparator. Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
Monostable circuit. 16.- Analog integrator.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems: 10.- Fault study in TTL circuit. Others types of integrated gates:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of 11.- Fault study in Logic Gates. 20.- Study of simple operations with a
sources. 12.- Exercises. Schmitt Trigger inverter.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit. CMOS gates: 21.- Operation study of a three-state
3.- Exercises. 13.- Basic function gates. buffer.
Logical circuits: 14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit. 22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
4.- Logical Diode. 15.- Exercises. 23.- Exercises.
5.- Fault study in Sources. Boolean Algebra and logical functions: Additional Possibilities:
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes. 16.- Study of use of Circuit #3. JK Flip-Flop.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit. 17.- Exercises. Control of Data Bus.
8.- Exercises. Open collector gates:
TTL gates: 18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
9.- Basic function gates. 19.- Exercises.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders: 8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers. Arithmetic and logic operations:
1.- Study of an encoder. 9.- Exercises. 16.- Study of an adder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder. Demultiplexers: 17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
3.- Exercises. 10.- Study of a demultiplexer. and logic operations.
Decoders: 11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers. 18.- Study of a parity generator.
4.- Study of a decoder. 12.- Exercises. 19.- Study of the error in the Parity
5.- Fault study in the decoder. Digital Comparators: generator.
6.- Exercises. 13.- Study of a comparator. 20.- Exercises.
Multiplexers: 14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
7.- Study of a multiplexer. 15.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables: 7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers. 13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
1.- Bistables. 8.- Exercises. Sequential circuits.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates. Counters: 14.- Exercises.
3.- Practical performance. 9.- Practice of the Counters. Memories:
4.- Study of error in the Bistables. 10.- Study of faults of the Counters. 15.- Exercises.
5.- Exercises. 11.- Exercises.
Shift registers: Synchronised sequential circuits:
6.- Shift registers. 12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display Photo-conducting cells: 11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
(LCD): 6.- Light dependent resistors. 12.- Exercises.
1.- Light transmitters. 7.- Alarm. Infrared:
2.- Bar graph. 8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting 13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display. cell. 14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and 9.- Exercises. 15.- Exercises.
liquid crystal display. Fibre optics:
5.- Exercises. 10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement Logical source.
student’s own circuits, it consists on: Set of potentiometers.
Development board. Pulse generator and inverters.
Power supply connector. Interrupter.
Digital visual display unit. Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer. 3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer. 4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature Temperature Dependent Resistance used in an alarm circuit (double
transducer: (T.D.R) transducer. thermistor).
1.- Characteristics of an integrated The N.T.C (Negative Temperature The “K” type thermocouple temperature
temperature circuit. Coefficient) thermistor: thermistor:
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer. 4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C 6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer: thermistor. thermopar.
3.- Characteristics of a platinum 5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell. 4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor. 7.- Photoconductive Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell. 5.- Photodiode PIN. 8.- Luminous intensity detector.
3.- Phototransistor. 6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable 2.- Characteristics of a Variable 3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Differential Transformer (LVDT). Resistance. Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor. 3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto 3.- Characteristics of an inductive 5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
transducer and its applications for transducer. Magnet tachogenerator.
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective 4.- Characteristics of a half effect
opto-transducer. transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic 2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic 3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
Microphone. Receiver.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
transducer: (T.D.R) transducer. thermistor:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated The N.T.C (Negative Temperature 6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
temperature circuit. Coefficient) thermistor: thermocouple.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l 4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
thermometer. 5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used 7.- Characteristic of a pressure
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer: in an alarm circuit (double transducer.
3.- Characteristics of a platinum thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter. 5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter. 5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional 6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block 9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
block. composition: Negative zero and
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator Negative Pole.
block. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole. means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order order system.
plant. 8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal means of Optimum Quantitative.
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis. 2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to - Some electronic sub-boards already
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the provide generic support to up to 8 developed:
M99 Board
electronic sub-boards, each one with its M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
own specific functionality, customized to M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
client necessities.
M99-3. Function Generator.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors M99-4. AM Modulator.
reserved for it on the M99 Board. M99-5. AM Demodulator.
There are connectors, in both the sub- * We can design and include any
boards and on the M99, through which one electronic circuit or application on a
can access the internal input/output data sub-board according to customer
points, to take measures and get requirements. This way, any
information about the practice. Thus, the Modules can be complemented with
student carries out the pedagogical aims. extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board The sub-boards can also be
there are 14 connectors for power supply. purchased independently to the
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be modules, thus giving total
supplied with different voltage intensities. freedom to customers in the
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC- acquisition of circuits.
100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
Software
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Module
(electronic board)
+ Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
Instructor Student/Module These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
Software Software information on the subject of study.
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Basic electricity -M8/SOF. Filters. -M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.). -M9/SOF. Power Electronics. -M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.). -M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters. -M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks. -M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals. -M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism. -M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits. -M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
Basic Electronic: -M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits. -M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I. -M14/SOF. Optoelectronics. Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II. -M15/SOF. Development Module. -M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies. Basic Electronic: Transducers: -M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators. -M41/SOF. Resistance transducers. -M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers. -M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
click CAL will perform the calculations. be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different ...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
reference sources while in progress. For example: the tables. Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
names, conversion factors...
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
Data Acquisition
Electronics
5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
1 Cables to
interface and virtual
instrumentation
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
2
Connection software represented.
Data acquisition
points We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
3
board
4 Data acquisition Cable cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
interface box to
“n” computer Student connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
post
Module Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
(electronic board)
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board). DAIB
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
computer slot. This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version: only difference that for this one, the sampling
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to: rate to 250,000 S/s .
1,250,000 S/s. DAB
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope. -Function generator. -Transient recorder.
-Multimeter. -Spectrum analyzer. -Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-211/10S 1 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
LIEBA BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1 EBC-100 BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY 1
2 M4 SEMICONDUCTORS II MODULE 1
3 M4/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
SEMICONDUCTORS II
4 M4/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
SEMICONDUCTORS II (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
5 M6 OSCILATORS MODULE 1
6 M6/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
OSCILLATORS
7 M6/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
OSCILLATORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
8 M7 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS I MODULE 1
9 M7/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
10 M7/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
11 M8 FILTERS MODULE 1
12 M8/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
FILTERS
13 M8/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
FILTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
14 M9 POWER ELECTRONICS MODULE 1
15 M9/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
POWER ELCTRONICS
16 M9/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER 10
ELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
17 M10 DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS MODULE 1
18 M10/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS
19 M10/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
DIGITAL SYSTEMS & CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
20 M11 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS MODULE 1
21 M11/SOF * COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS
22 M11/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
23 M12 BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS MODULE 1
Ref: 0213-211/10S 2 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
24 M12/SOF * COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
25 M12/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC 10
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
26 M13 BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS MODULE 1
27 M13/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
28 M13/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC 10
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
29 M14 OPTOELECTRONICS MODULE 1
30 M14/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
OPTOELECTRONICS
31 M14/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
OPTOELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
32 M18 THREE-PHASE CIRCUITS MODULE 1
33 M18/SOF * COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 10
THREE-PHASE
34 M18/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THREE- 10
PHASE CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
35 INS/SOF CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE 1
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
36 EDAS/VIS-0.25 EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL 1
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIS VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope, 1
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DAIB DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX 1
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
EDAS/SOF DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE 1
37 EFAC THREE DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D),
FORMED BY:
FUB BASE STRUCTURE AND ROBOT FOR THREE 1
DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM
EFAC/CIB CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR THREE DIMENSIONS 1
PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D)
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
EFAC/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
PHYSICS SYSTEM
FCE SET FOR ELECTRICAL FIELDS (3D) APPLICATION, 1
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
FCM SET FOR MAGNETIC FIELDS (3D APPLICATION, 1
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
38 0211PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
Ref: 0213-211/10S 3 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
39 0211PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
40 0211IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
41 0211CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
42 0211MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
43 0211TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.- Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2 Modules 1 Power Supply 2 Modules
(power supply needed) FA-CO (power supply needed)
(M1) (M9)
(M2) (M10)
or
EBC-100
(M16) (M11)
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
(M17) Technique (M12)
INS/SOF. Instructor Software
+
(M3) (M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(M4) 4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M5) (M15)
(M31)
(M6)
5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used (M60)
(M7) Teaching
Technique
DAIB. Data acquisition interface box
(M8) (M65)
DAB. Data acquisition board
EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Other modules Software Expansion Board (M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity: " M14. Optoelectronics. Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits. " M15. Development Module. " M99. Expansion Board.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers: Some electronic sub-boards available:
" M16. Electric Networks. " M41. Resistance Transducers. "M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
" M17. Electromagnetism. " M43. Applications of Temperature. "M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
Basic Electronics: " M44. Applications of Light. "M99-3. Function Generator.
" M3. Semiconductors I. " M45. Linear Position and Force. "M99-4. AM Modulator.
" M4. Semiconductors II. " M46. Environmental Measurements. "M99-5. AM Demodulator.
" M5. Power Supplies. " M47. Rotational Speed & Position
" M6. Oscillators. Control. * We can develop any electronic sub-board
" M7. Operational Amplifiers. " M48. Sounds Measurements. according to the application required by
" M8. Filters. " M49. Applications of Temperature and the customer.
" M9. Power Electronics. Pressure.
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters. Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals. " M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits. " M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits. " M65. Control and Regulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
1 Power Supply
Electronics
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2 Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Measurement managing and checking 10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit. 18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
instruments: 11.-Theoretical / practical exercises. Bridge circuit.
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation. Resistors association and the Wheatstone 19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Use of multimeter. Bridge: Kirchoff's laws:
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit. 12.-Voltage and current measurement 20.- Kirchoff's first law.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit. in a circuit with resistors connected 21.- Kirchoff's second law.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises. in series. 22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
Ohm's Law: 13.-Series/Parallel configuration study. 23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
5.-Ohm's Law verification. 14.-The Wheatstone Bridge. Additional Possibilities:
6.-Power calculation. 15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors Voltage/Current dividers.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises. circuit. Batteries and Switches.
Resistors: characteristics and types: 16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors Power source in series and parallel.
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code. circuit. The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
Ohmmeter. 17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit. Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Alternating signal characteristics. with the frequency. RLC Circuits:
Instruments: 14.-Study of faults in capacitors. 30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
1.- Waveforms study in A.C. 15.-Reactive capacitance variations with 31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the the capacitance. and High- Pass filters.
Wave form circuit. 16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel. 32.- Exercises.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform 17.-A.C. capacitors in series. Resonance:
circuit. 18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers. 33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
4.- Relation between peak values and 19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit. impedance source.
RMS for sinusoidal waves. 20.-Inductive reactance variations with 34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal the inductance. 35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
alternating current. 21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit. Circuit.
6.-Measurements using the 22.-Exercises. 36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
oscilloscope. Basic theorems and capacitance and impedance source.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles inductance circuits: 37.- Circuit frequency response and
for resistors in sinusoidal 23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in bandwidth.
alternating current. series. 38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series. 24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in 39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel. parallel. circuit.
10.- Exercises. 25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in 40.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors: series. The transformer:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform 26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3. 41.- The transformer.
and sinusoidal input current. 27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3. 42.- The transformer with load.
12.- Inductance with square waveform 28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in 43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
and a sinusoidal input voltage. parallel. 44.- Exercises.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations 29.-Exercises.
M16. Electric Networks PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Ohm’s law: 9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly. Star-triangle transformation:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance 10.-DC+AC assembly. 17.- Resistance measurement between
of a continuous source. 11.-Theoretical/practical exercises. terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance. Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems: 18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an 12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent Wheatstone bridge:
alternating source. circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws. 19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises. fed by a DC source.
Electrical power: 13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to Superposition theorem: 20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
load. 14.-Application of the Superposition circuit.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC theorem. 21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
source. 15.-Error study in the Superposition by an AC source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises. circuit. Component values 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination: modifications. Additional Possibilities:
8.-DC+DC assembly. 16.-Theoretical/practical exercises. Millman’s Theorem.
M17. Electromagnetism PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-Magnetic fields measurement. 8.- Basic operation of the solenoid. continuous current motor.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil 9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit. 15.- Motor used as DC generator.
Reactance calculation. 10.-Basic operation of a relay. 16.- Cemf.
3.-Exercises. 11.-Self-holding of the position of the 17.- Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications: contacts. Stepping Motor:
4.-Mutual Inductance. 12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit. 18.- Stepper motor working.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer 13.-Exercises. 19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
6.-Core effect in a transformer response. Direct current motor: 20.- Exercises.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer. 14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction: The Zener diode: 15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
1.- Study of the diode. 9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode. 16.- Exercises.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes. 10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit. Common emitter amplifier:
3.- Exercises. 11.- Exercises. 17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
The diode as a rectifier element: Study and characteristics of the transistor: amplifier.
4.- Half wave rectifier. 12.- Study of the transistor. 18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit. 13.- Study of the fault in the transistor. 19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
6.- Bridge rectifier. 14.- Exercises. amplifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier. Transistor characteristics operating as a 20.- Exercises.
8.- Exercises. switch:
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Complementary transistors pair: 7.- Exercises. Analog switch:
1.- Complementary transistors pair. Differential amplifier: 14.- Analog switch.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal. 8.- Differential amplifier. 15.- Exercises.
3.- Fault study of the complementary 9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier. Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
Transistor pair. 10.- Exercises. 16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
4.- Exercises. Study and characteristics of the JFET 17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
Darlington configuration: transistor: directly.
5.- Darlington configuration. 11.- JFET characteristics. 18.- Exercises.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington 12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
configuration. 13.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Rectification: 8.- Protection against overvoltages. 16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
1.- Rectification. 9.- Study of the fault “Protection against 17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
2.- Bridge rectifier. overcurrents”. 18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 10.- Theoretical/practical exercises. Introduction to switched power supplies:
Fixed voltage sources: Symmetrical voltage power sources: 19.- Switching technique.
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode. 11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator. 20.- Switching technique. PWM.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and 12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator. 21.- Switching technique. Boost.
Transistor. 13.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through Voltage regulators with integrated circuits: Additional Possibilities:
Zener and Transistor”. 14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317. Voltage Feedback.
7.- Protection against overcurrents. 15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317. DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets: 6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator. Astable multivibrator:
1.- RC net oscillator. 7.- Exercises. 12.- Astable multivibrator.
2.- LC net oscillator. Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator: 13.- Fault study with an Astable
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net 8.- Colpitts oscillator. mulltivibrator.
oscillators. 9.- Hartley oscillator. 14.- Exercises.
4.- Exercises. 555 TIMER:
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts 15.- 555 timer.
Wien bridge oscillator: Oscillator. 16.- 555 timer fault study.
5.- Wien Bridge. 11.- Exercises. 17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics: 8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier. 16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
1.- Operational amplifier study. 9.- Voltage follower. 17.- Exercises.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation 10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
voltage. Amplifier. 18.- Comparator study.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study. 11.- Exercises. 19.- Comparators fault study.
4.- Exercises. The adder amplifier: 20.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier: 12.- Adding amplifier study. Additional Possibilities:
5.- Inverting amplifier study. 13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier. Attenuator.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study. 14.- Exercises. Voltage Divider.
7.- Exercises. The differential amplifier: Open-loop operation.
The non-inverting amplifier: 15.- Differential amplifier study.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
RC and LC filter responses: 10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T. 18.- Study of Faults in filters.
1.- Frequency response. 11.- Exercises theoretical/practical. 19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
2.- Low-pass filter. Active filters: Association of filters:
3.- High-pass filter. 12.- Low-pass filter. 20.- Behaviour of the filter.
4.- LC Circuit. 13.- Low-pass filter with load and 21.- Filter of distorted signal.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter. operational amplifier. 22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
14.- High-pass filter. high pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter. 23.- Filter in parallel.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical. 15.- High-pass filter with load and 24.- Study of Error in filters.
T-shaped Filter: operational amplifier. 25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
8.- Filter with double T link. 16.- The attenuation is cumulative. Additional Possibilities:
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1. 17.- Use of Operational Amplifier. Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
M9. Power Electronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor: The thyristor: 11.- Study of insulation circuits.
1.-Study of the power transistor. 7.- Study of the thyristor. 12.- Exercises.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor. 8.- Study of the error of the thyristor. The TRIAC:
3.-Exercises. 9.- Exercises. 13.- Study of the TRIAC.
The MOSFET transistor: The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the 14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor. thyristor: 15.- Exercises.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET. 10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the Additional Possibilities:
6.-Exercises. thyristor. Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics (continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable 9.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
and monostable family: Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7- 18.- Triangular wave generation.
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch segments Displays: 19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
chip. 10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN A/D and D/A conversion:
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment 20.- D/A Converter.
Multiplexer. Display. 21.- A/D Converter.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog 11.- Error Study in the binary counter. 22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Multiplexer. 12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D Applications:
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment 23.- Random number generator.
Integrated circuit. Display. 24.- Measuring the time between two
5.-Error Study in the bistable. 13.- Error Study in the BCD counter. events.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated 14.- Theoretical/practical exercises. 25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
astable circuit. Comparators and analog integrators:
7.-Error Study in the astable. 15.- Characteristics of an analog Additional Possibilities:
8.-Characteristics of an integrated comparator. Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
Monostable circuit. 16.- Analog integrator.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems: 10.- Fault study in TTL circuit. Others types of integrated gates:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of 11.- Fault study in Logic Gates. 20.- Study of simple operations with a
sources. 12.- Exercises. Schmitt Trigger inverter.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit. CMOS gates: 21.- Operation study of a three-state
3.- Exercises. 13.- Basic function gates. buffer.
Logical circuits: 14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit. 22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
4.- Logical Diode. 15.- Exercises. 23.- Exercises.
5.- Fault study in Sources. Boolean Algebra and logical functions: Additional Possibilities:
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes. 16.- Study of use of Circuit #3. JK Flip-Flop.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit. 17.- Exercises. Control of Data Bus.
8.- Exercises. Open collector gates:
TTL gates: 18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
9.- Basic function gates. 19.- Exercises.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders: 8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers. Arithmetic and logic operations:
1.- Study of an encoder. 9.- Exercises. 16.- Study of an adder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder. Demultiplexers: 17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
3.- Exercises. 10.- Study of a demultiplexer. and logic operations.
Decoders: 11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers. 18.- Study of a parity generator.
4.- Study of a decoder. 12.- Exercises. 19.- Study of the error in the Parity
5.- Fault study in the decoder. Digital Comparators: generator.
6.- Exercises. 13.- Study of a comparator. 20.- Exercises.
Multiplexers: 14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
7.- Study of a multiplexer. 15.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables: 7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers. 13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
1.- Bistables. 8.- Exercises. Sequential circuits.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates. Counters: 14.- Exercises.
3.- Practical performance. 9.- Practice of the Counters. Memories:
4.- Study of error in the Bistables. 10.- Study of faults of the Counters. 15.- Exercises.
5.- Exercises. 11.- Exercises.
Shift registers: Synchronised sequential circuits:
6.- Shift registers. 12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display Photo-conducting cells: 11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
(LCD): 6.- Light dependent resistors. 12.- Exercises.
1.- Light transmitters. 7.- Alarm. Infrared:
2.- Bar graph. 8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting 13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display. cell. 14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and 9.- Exercises. 15.- Exercises.
liquid crystal display. Fibre optics:
5.- Exercises. 10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement Logical source.
student’s own circuits, it consists on: Set of potentiometers.
Development board. Pulse generator and inverters.
Power supply connector. Interrupter.
Digital visual display unit. Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer. 3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer. 4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature Temperature Dependent Resistance used in an alarm circuit (double
transducer: (T.D.R) transducer. thermistor).
1.- Characteristics of an integrated The N.T.C (Negative Temperature The “K” type thermocouple temperature
temperature circuit. Coefficient) thermistor: thermistor:
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer. 4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C 6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer: thermistor. thermopar.
3.- Characteristics of a platinum 5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell. 4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor. 7.- Photoconductive Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell. 5.- Photodiode PIN. 8.- Luminous intensity detector.
3.- Phototransistor. 6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable 2.- Characteristics of a Variable 3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Differential Transformer (LVDT). Resistance. Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor. 3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto 3.- Characteristics of an inductive 5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
transducer and its applications for transducer. Magnet tachogenerator.
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective 4.- Characteristics of a half effect
opto-transducer. transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic 2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic 3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
Microphone. Receiver.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
transducer: (T.D.R) transducer. thermistor:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated The N.T.C (Negative Temperature 6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
temperature circuit. Coefficient) thermistor: thermocouple.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l 4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
thermometer. 5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used 7.- Characteristic of a pressure
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer: in an alarm circuit (double transducer.
3.- Characteristics of a platinum thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
Electronics
2 Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter. 5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter. 5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional 6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block 9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
block. composition: Negative zero and
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator Negative Pole.
block. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole. means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order order system.
plant. 8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal means of Optimum Quantitative.
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis. 2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to - Some electronic sub-boards already
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the provide generic support to up to 8 developed:
M99 Board
electronic sub-boards, each one with its M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
own specific functionality, customized to M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
client necessities.
M99-3. Function Generator.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors M99-4. AM Modulator.
reserved for it on the M99 Board. M99-5. AM Demodulator.
There are connectors, in both the sub- * We can design and include any
boards and on the M99, through which one electronic circuit or application on a
can access the internal input/output data sub-board according to customer
points, to take measures and get requirements. This way, any
information about the practice. Thus, the Modules can be complemented with
student carries out the pedagogical aims. extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board The sub-boards can also be
there are 14 connectors for power supply. purchased independently to the
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be modules, thus giving total
supplied with different voltage intensities. freedom to customers in the
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC- acquisition of circuits.
100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
2.1- Basic Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
Software
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Module
(electronic board)
+ Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
Instructor Student/Module These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
Software Software information on the subject of study.
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Basic electricity -M8/SOF. Filters. -M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.). -M9/SOF. Power Electronics. -M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.). -M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters. -M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks. -M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals. -M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism. -M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits. -M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
Basic Electronic: -M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits. -M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I. -M14/SOF. Optoelectronics. Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II. -M15/SOF. Development Module. -M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies. Basic Electronic: Transducers: -M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators. -M41/SOF. Resistance transducers. -M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers. -M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
4 LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
click CAL will perform the calculations. be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different ...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
reference sources while in progress. For example: the tables. Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
names, conversion factors...
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11 www.edibon.com
2.1- Basic Electronics (continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
Data Acquisition
Electronics
5 EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
1 Cables to
interface and virtual
instrumentation
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
2
Connection software represented.
Data acquisition
points We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
3
board
4 Data acquisition Cable cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
interface box to
“n” computer Student connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
post
Module Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
(electronic board)
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board). DAIB
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
computer slot. This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version: only difference that for this one, the sampling
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to: rate to 250,000 S/s .
1,250,000 S/s. DAB
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope. -Function generator. -Transient recorder.
-Multimeter. -Spectrum analyzer. -Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS MODULE
Ref: 0230 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 SAIT TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION TRAINER 1
2 SAIT/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 1
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION
3 SAIT/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
4 BS MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
BSPC BASIC UNIT WITH COMPUTER CONTROLLED 1
INTERFACE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY
OF SENSORS
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
BS/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR
THE STUDY OF SENSORS
BS-1 VIBRATIONS AND /OR DEFORMATION MODULE 1
BS-2 TEMPERATURE MODULE 1
BS-3 PRESSURE MODULE 1
BS-4 FLOW MODULE 1
BS-5 OVENS MODULE 1
BS-6 LIQUID LEVEL MODULE 1
BS-7 TACHOMETER MODULE 1
BS-8 PROXIMITY MODULE 1
BS-9 PNEUMATIC MODULE 1
BS-10 LIGHT TEST MODULE 1
5 BS/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 1
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS
6 BS/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 1
STUDY OF SENSORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS) OF THE MODULES: BS-1 VIBRATIONS,
BS-2 TEMPERATURE, BS-3 PRESSURE, BS-4 FLOW,
BS-5 OVENS, BS-6 LIQUID LEVEL, BS-7
TACHOMETER, BS-8 PROXIMITY & BS-9 PNEUMATIC
7 INS/SOF CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE 1
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
8 EDAS/VIS-0.25 EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL 1
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIS VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope, 1
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DAIB DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX 1
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
EDAS/SOF DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE 1
9 0230PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
10 0230PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
11 0230IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
12 0230CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
13 0230TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
14 0230MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0230 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.3- Transducers and Sensors (continuation)
SAIT. Transducers and Instrumentation Trainer
2.- Electronics
Electronics
Optional:
EDAS/VIS.
EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Data Acquisition
Data and Virtual
Data Acquisition Interface Box Acquisition Instrumentation
Board Software
SAIT. Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The SAIT trainer shows didactically the function principles 1.- Basic Control Systems description. Linear Position transducers.
of the transducers most used in industry. It is divided into
Characteristics of the Control System: 40.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable Differential
two parts: the lower part, in which all the input and output Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of an ON/OFF temperature
transducers are found, while in the upper part, the system
control System. 41.- Characteristics of a Variable Resistance.
of signal conditioning and those of instrumentation are
3.- Characteristics of an ON/ OFF Lighting System. 42.- Characteristics of a Strain gauge Transducer.
found; the electrical and pneumatic power supplies are
housed in its interior. 4.- Investigation of the Characteristics of a Positional Transducers for Environmental Measurement
Control System. Applications:
Input Transducers:
5. - Proportional Control. 43.- Characteristics of a air flow transducer.
Resistance Transducers for applications in angular or
linear position: 6.- Proportional+Integral Control. 44.- Characteristics of a pressure sensor.
Linearly sliding potentiometer. Rotary carbon-track 7. - Proportional+DerivateControl. 45.- Characteristics of a humidity sensor.
potentiometer. Rotary coil potentiometer. Precision 8. - Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control. Rotational Velocity Transducers or Position Measuring
servo- potentiometer. The Wheatstone Bridge circuit. 9. - Characteristics of a Speed Control System. Applications:
Applications of temperature: 10.- Operation in Open Loop. 46.- Characteristics of a slotted opto-transducers and its
11.- Operation in Closed Loop, Proportional Control. applications for counting and speed measurement.
NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
Thermistors. RTD Sensor (Platinum Transducer with 12.- Proportional+Integral Control. 47.- Characteristics of the reflective optotransducers
and Gray code disk.
Temperature dependent Resistance). Temperature 13.- Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
sensor IC “Integrated Circuit LM 335”. Type “K” 48.- Characteristics of an inductive transducer.
Display devices:
Thermocouples. 49.- Characteristics of a Hall effect transducer.
14.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a meter of
Applications of light: time. 50.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent magnet
Photovoltaic Cell. Phototransistor. Photodiode PIN. Tachogenerator.
15.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a simple counter.
Photoconductive Cell. Transducers for Measuring Sound:
16.- Application of the Timer/Counter as rev-counter or
Linear position and force: frequency-meter. 51.- Characteristics of a Dynamic Microphone.
Linear Variable Differential Transformer LVDT. 17.- Characteristics of an L.E.D. bargraph display unit. 52.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic receiver.
Extensiometric Transducer. 18.- Characteristic of a Mobile Coil Meter. Transducers for Sound Output:
Environmental measurements: 19.- Comparison of Digital, Bargraph and Mobile Coil 53.- Characteristics of the mobile coil loudspeaker.
Air flow Sensor. Air pressure Sensor. Humidity sensor. meters. 54.- Characteristics of a Buzzer.
Rotational speed and position control: 20.- To widen the voltage index of the B. M. meter. Output Transducer for Linear or Angular Movement:
Slotted optoelectronic Sensor. Opto-reflective Variable Resistance transducers in angle or linear 55.- Characteristics of a D.C. Solenoid.
Sensor. Inductive sensor. Hall effect Sensor. arrangement: 56.- Characteristics of a D.C. Relay.
Permanent D.C. magnet tachogenerator. 21.- Variation of the Output Voltage for a 57.- Characteristics of a Solenoid air valve.
Sound measurements: Potentiometer used as a Position transducer. 58.- Characteristics of a Permanent Magnet Motor.
Dynamical microphone. Ultrasonic receiver. 22.- The Buffer as compensator for the effect of the load Signal Conditioning Circuits:
Visualization Devices: on the output voltage of a potentiometer. 59.- Characteristics of the Direct Current amplifiers 1,
Timing device/ counter with LED display. Graphic bar 23.- Servo potentiometer. Variation of the output 2 and x100.
visualizer. Mobile coil voltmeter. voltage with respect to its position. 60.- Characteristics of a current amplifier and
Output Transducers: 24.- Measuring the Resistance using a Wheatstone application of a buffer amplifier.
Electrical Resistance. Incandescent Lamp. Bridge Circuit. 61.- Characteristics of Power and Buffer Amplifiers.
Applications for the sound output: 25.- Measuring the Voltage using “Null Balance” 62.- Characteristics of an Inverter Amplifier.
Buzzing (Buzzer). Mobile coil loud speaker. Ultrasonic Procedures (Method1).
63.- Characteristics of a Differential Amplifier.
transmitter. 26.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages Signal Converter Circuits:
Applications of linear or angular motion:
smaller than the normal available voltage. 64.- Characteristics of a Voltage to Current Converter.
D.C. Soleinod. D.C. Relay. Solenoid Valve.
27.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance” 65.- Characteristics of a Current to Voltage Converter.
Permanent Magnet D.C. Motor.
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages 66.-Characteristics of a Voltage to Frequency
Signal Conditioners: greater than the normal voltage. Converter.
D.C. Amplifiers. A.C. Amplifier. Power Amplifier.
Transducers for Applications of Temperature 67.-Characteristics of a Frequency to Voltage
Current Amplifier. Buffers. Inverting Amplifier. Measurement: Converter.
Differential amplifier. V/F and F/V Converters. V/I
28.- Characteristics of an Integrated Temperature Circuit. 68.- Characteristics of a Full Wave Rectifier.
and I/V Converters. Full Wave Rectifier. Hysteresis
29.- Construction of a Digital Thermometer using the Comparators, Oscillator and Filters:
convertible Comparator. Electronic switch. Oscillator facilities of the TRANSDUCER TRAINER.
40 kHz. Filter 40 kHz. Time-constant convertible 69.- Characteristics of a Comparator.
30.- Characteristics of a Platinum Temperature 70.- Characteristics of an Alarm Oscillator circuit.
Low Pass Filter. Dependent Resistance (T.D.R.) Transducer.
Circuit with Mathematical Operation: Adding 71.- Characteristics of an Electronic Switch.
31.- T h e N . T. C . ( N e g a t i v e Te m p e r a t u r e
amplifier. Integrator with different time constants. coefficient)Thermistor. 72.- Characteristics of the Oscillator of 40 kHz.
Differentiator with different time constants. 32.- Characteristics of an N.T.C. Thermistor 73.- Characteristics of Filters.
Instrumentation Amplifier. Circuit SAMPLE & HOLD. (Resistance measuring method). Circuits that carry out Mathematical Operations:
Amplifiers with gain control and offset. 33.- Characteristics of the N.T.C. Thermistor used in an 74.- Characteristics of a Adding Amplifier.
Furthermore it contains a linearly mounted system of a alarm circuit (double thermistor). 75.- Characteristics of an Integrator.
D.C. motor, tachodynamo, reflective, slotted opto- 34.- Characteristics of a Type “K” Thermocouple. 76.- Characteristics of a Differentiator Circuit.
sensors to detect the absolute and incremental position. Transducers for Light Measuring Applications: 77.- Characteristics of a Sample and Hold Circuit.
Cables. 35.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
Manuals: 8 manuals supplied. 36.- Characteristics of a photo-transistor.
Dimensions (approx.): 400 x 400 x 300 mm. 37.- Luminous intensity detector.
Weight: 10 Kg.
38.-The P .I.N. Photodiode.
More information in: 39.- Characteristics of a P .I.N. Photodiode.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
electronics/transducerssensors/SAIT.pdf
Page 22
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
2.- Electronics
Electronics
2 Test Modules 1 Base Units: 2 Test Modules
(to be used with Base Units) (common for all test modules type “BS”) (to be used with Base Units)
BS1 BS6
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA.
EDIBON Computer Control System
Base
Unit
Computer
(not included
BS2 Data Acquisition Software for: in the supply)
Board - Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
BS7
OR
BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
BS3
BS8
BS4
BS9
BS5
Other modules
“BS” System includes a set of electronic components with a twofold purpose: to control the signal produced by the transducers, and to evaluate and quantify it.
Sensors or transducers are common elements in the state of our technology. Therefore this SYSTEM has been developed to show the basic principles of different types
of sensors and their way of processing signals.
This system consists of:
1 Base Unit, to control the system:
Option 1: BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit, including EDIBON Computer Control System. OR
Option 2: BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
2 Test Modules:
BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test BS4. Flow Test Module. BS8. Proximity Test Module.
Module. BS5. Ovens Test Module. BS9. Pneumatic Test Module.
BS2. Temperature Test Module. BS6. Liquid Level Test Module.
BS3. Pressure Test Module. BS7. Tachometers Test Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 18
2.3- Transducers and
2.1- Basic Electronics Sensors (continuation)
2.- Electronics
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors: (continuation)
1 Base Units
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System:
Control Interface integrated in the unit box (BSPC). Data acquisition board to be installed in a computer slot.
Computer Control Software.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BSUB. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
2 Test Modules
BS1.Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This Test Module has been designed to teach mechanical vibration and 1.- To measure the vibration of a vibrant girder using
displacement variable measurement techniques. extensiometric gauges.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- To use a heating resistance to rise the girder temperature
represented graphically. in order to study the effect on the sensors.(Thermocouple
Extensiometric gauges: and heating resistance).
Characteristics: Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W. Gauge factor at 24ºC: 3.- To detect the displacement of the BS1 system vibrant
2.120. girder using a LVDT sensor.
Heating resistance and thermocouple: 4.- Effect of temperature variation on an extensiometric
Resistance to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar. beam.
Thermocouple type “K”. Temperature range:-50ºC to 350ºC. 5.- Effect of deformation on the resistance of a beam.
LVDT Sensor: Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC. 6.- Measure of the three deformation dimensions or
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power deformation of spherical or cylindrical systems.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 7.- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) for
Test Module. measuring displacements.
8.- Analysis of how to compensate the variation of resistance
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
of a gauge due to temperature variations, using shorted
Each module may operate independently of another. circuits with compensating gauges.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x350 mm. Weight: 10 Kg. 9.- Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT) as a
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/ weighing system.
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf 10.- Effect on the vibration of a beam with different masses.
BS2.Temperature Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The Temperature Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of sensors of temperature as a measure, and its control. 1.- How to use the Curie effect as application of a high
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are temperature thermostatic controller.
represented graphically. 2.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. To use the bimetallic
Bimetallic switch sensor: Opening temperature: 50ºC. Closing thermostat as a temperature control, calculating its
Temp.: 30ºC. hysteresis.
Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor: 3.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. How we can reduce the
Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC. hysteresis by adding a resistor to the heating circuit.
Relay AC: Voltage and current (nominal) :250V-10A. 3 sockets. 4.- To use the thermostat based on a bimetallic sensor to
Switching voltage: 12 V.
control the temperature.
Capillary thermostat: Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
Thermocouples: 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K. 5.- Capillary thermostatic controller.
Temperature range: - 50ºC to 250ºC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x335 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available. Page 19 www.edibon.com
2.3- Transducers and Sensors (continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
2.- Electronics
(continuation)
Electronics
2 Test Modules (continuation)
BS3.Pressure Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The Pressure Test Module has been designed to teach the use and 1.- Use of linear positioning sensor (potentiometer) to detect
applications of this kind of sensors measurement systems. It shows the the displacement produced by a diaphragm expansion
different pressure measurement techniques. caused by the air pressure.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- Use of a LVDT as an element to measure the diaphragm
represented graphically.
distortion that is consequence of the pressure inside the
Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer).
pressure chamber.
Resistor range: 500 W to 5 KW. Operation force: 200-750g.
LVDT sensor: Sensibility: 780mV/mm. Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc. 3.- Differential pressure sensor with hole-board system. Use
Differential pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. of a differential pressure sensor of the semiconductor
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi. Overpressure: 60 psi. type to measure the pressure fall in a hole-board system.
Extensiometric gauges: Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120 W. Gauge 4.- Extensiometric Gauges. To detect objects using an
factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical. infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
Manometric pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi. 5.- Measure the pressure in the chamber, using two different
Overpressure: 60 psi.
types of sensors (manometric and absolute pressure
Absolute pressure sensor: Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi. sensor).
Air Compressor: Air flow: 10 l /min. Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2. Power 6.- Extensiometric gauges for measuring deformations: their
supply: 220V, 50/60Hz. resistance changes as the diaphragm expands due to the
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power pressure coming from the pressure container.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the Test
Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x320 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS4.Flow Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The objective this module is to show techniques to measure 1.- To measure the water volume produced by an
changeable fluids. underwater pump in the module using an optical flow
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically. sensor.
Flow optical sensor: 2.- To use a high-resolution optical flow sensor to measure
Power supply: 4.5 to 24 Vdc. Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM. low volumes.
High resolution optical flow sensor: Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5 3.- Level sensor by pressure. To use a differential pressure
l/min. sensor to measure the liquid level in one of the tanks.
Underwater pump. 4.- Differential pressure sensor. To measure the pressure-fall
Level sensor by pressure: It is a differential pressure sensor. Pressure in the module hole board system, as a necessary
range: 0 to 1psi. Overpressure: 20psi.
parameter to determine volume.
Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system): Measurement
range: 0 to 30 psi. Overpressure: 60 psi. 5.- To measure the flow volume generated by the underwater
Changeable flow meter: Range:0 -2 l/min. pump using a flow meter of changeable area.
V narrowing. 6.- To obtain the flow-volume value in the secondary tank
Main and secondary tanks. using the V narrowing weir.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS5.Ovens Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
With “BS5” Test Module it is possible to study temperature 1.- Heating resistance. Raise the oven internal temperature
measurement techniques using several kinds of sensors placed over the environmental temperature using a heating
inside the sealed place that is used as oven. resistance to make tests and practices related with
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are temperature measurement.
represented graphically.
Oven chamber. 2.- To use a fan as refrigerating element of the oven.
Heating resistance: Maximum dissipation power of 500W. 3.- To use thermocouples as temperature sensors elements
Fan: Maximum power: 0.96 W. Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s. inside the oven. Temperature measurement using a
Thermocouples: thermocouple.
4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a 4.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a platinum
different height. Temperature range: -184 ºC to 400 ºC. resistance thermometer.
Platinum resistance thermometer: 5.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a
Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC. thermistor temperature sensor.
Thermistor: 6.- Temperature measurement using a thermistor, based on
NTC thermistor. Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW. Temperature its negative temperature coefficient.
range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
7.- To obtain the temperature value inside the oven, using a
Semiconductor temperature sensor: Reverse polarized diode.
semiconductor sensor (diode).
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel 8.- PID control.
of the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x470 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 20
2.3- Transducers and
2.1- Basic Electronics Sensors (continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors: (continuation)
2.- Electronics
2 Test Modules (continuation)
BS6.Liquid Level Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The Liquid Level Test Module “BS6” has been designed to teach the
use and applications of level sensors and their measurement systems. 1.- To use a capacitative sensor to measure the liquid level in
This module teaches techniques to measure and control the liquid the tank.
level in a tank.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- To use the differential pressure sensor as an element to
represented graphically. determine the water level in a tank.
Water tanks. 2 Minipumps: Power supply: 12Vdc (max. voltage). 3.- To use a changeable resistance fixed to a float system as a
Nominal current: 1 A DC. liquid level measurement element.
Capacitative level sensor. Pressure level sensor, pressure range: 0-
4.- Conduction Sensor. Use of a sensor made up of to steel
1psi. Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning
switches. Conduction sensor. Magnetic float level sensor. Optical level electrodes to measure the water level of a tank.
sensor. 5.- Magnetic float level sensor. Detect a precise tank liquid
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power level with a magnetic switch sensor.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 6.- Control the BS6 system left tank liquid level using an
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals. optical level sensor.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x300x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS7.Tachometers Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This module has been designed to teach linear and angular speed 1.- DC Motor. Provide the group of sensors of the BS7 system
measurement techniques.
fixed to the central axle of the equipment with movement
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically. power.
Inductive Sensor: output voltage: 2.- DC Tachometer. To use a DC motor as a tachometer to
DC Motor: nominal voltage: 12V., resistance: 9,7 Oh., max. vacuum measure the revolutions of the BS7 system central axle.
speed: 8500 r.p.m., max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m., start 3.- Inductive Sensor.
voltage: 210mV. DC Tachometer. 4.- Refractive Infrared Sensor. To measure the central axle
Refractive Infrared Sensor. Hall Effect position sensor. revolutions of the BS7 system using a light reflection
Slot Sensor: Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output optical sensor.
phototransistor are capsulated.
Encoder. 5.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a slotted
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power optical sensor through light interruption.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 6.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a Hall-effect
Test Module. position sensor.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals. 7.- To measure the central axle revolutions of the BS7 system
Each module may operate independently of another. using the encoder.
Dimensions (approx.) = 300x200x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS8.Proximity Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This Module has been designed to teach techniques to detect the 1.- How to use a capacitative sensor to detect metal objects
proximity of objects, focusing on the distance at which each sensor is
able to detect the object and the type of material it can detect. as the pass in front of the sensor.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are 2.- To use a Hall effect sensor as an element to detect the
represented graphically. presence of magnetic objects.
DC Motor: Nominal power supply: 12Vdc. 3.- Reflection infrared sensor. To use an optical sensor that
Proximity capacitative sensor, detection distance: 10 mm.
works through infrared light reflection.
Hall effect sensor.
Infrared sensor by reflection: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. 4.- Infrared sensor by transmission. To detect objects using
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector. an infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
Transmission infrared sensor: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter. 5.- Conduction sensor. To detect magnetic objects using a
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector. REED switch sensor.
Conduction sensor. Inductive sensor: detection distance: 2mm.
Ultrasound sensor: transmitter sensibility: 106 dB., receiver sensibility: 6.- To detect the presence of ferrous object using an inductive
65 dB., resonance frequency: 40kHz. sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power 7.- Ultrasound sensor. To detect metallic and non-metallic
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the object using high frequency sounds.
Test Module. Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS9.Pneumatic Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The Pneumatics Test Module “BS9” has been designed to teach 1.- Proportional valves. To control electronically the vertical
techniques of control and handling of a pneumatic piston.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are displacement of a double effect pneumatic piston using
represented graphically. proportional valves.
Proportional valve 1 and 2: Nominal voltage: 24Vdc, pressure range: 2.- Differential pressure sensor. To use a pressure sensor for
8 bar max., 0 to 6 bar control. Pneumatic switch: max. pressure: 6 measuring the pressure difference between both
bars. Regulation filter: manual drainage, max. input pressure: 8 bars.
Differential pressure sensor: measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. LVDT pneumatic piston air inlets.
Sensor. 3.- Pneumatic switch. To deflect the air flow in the BS9 system
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power using a pneumatic switch.
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the 4.- LVDT Linear Displacement Sensor. To measure pneumatic
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals. piston displacement using an excitation and DC output
Each module may operate independently of another. LVDT.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available. Page 21 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
SENSORS INSTRUMENTATION
Ref: 0231 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 SPC WEIGHING SYSTEM,COMPUTER CONTROLLED 1
2 SPC/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
WEIGHING SYSTEM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
3 SCSP PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM 1
4 SCSP/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
PRESSURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
5 SCST TEMPERATURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM 1
6 SCST/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
TEMPERATURE SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
7 SCSCN FLOW AND LEVEL SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM 1
8 SCSCN/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FLOW 1
AND LEVEL SENSORS CALIBRATION SYSTEM
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
9 0231PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
10 0231PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
11 0231IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
12 0230CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
13 0230TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
14 0231MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0231 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.3- Transducers and
2.1- Basic Electronics Sensors (continuation)
SPC. Computer Controlled Weighing System
2.- Electronics
Arm for balance with
counterbalance Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
Upper view
Force Sensor 2 3 4
detail Control Data Software for:
Interface Box Acquisition - Computer Control
Device for Board - Data Acquisition
5 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
the tray
coupling 6 Manuals
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
1 Unit: SPC. Weighing System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Sensor Calibration.
1 SPC Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. 2.- Hysteresis study.
Stainless steel arm for balance. Counterbalance of 0.5 and 1 Kg. Anodized aluminium tray. High precision force sensor of 0- 3.- Weight high precission measurement.
10N.
2 SPC/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the computer of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time control with flexibility of modifications from the computer keyboard of the
parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time, of
parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in
the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 SPC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 700x400x400 mm. Weight: 20 Kg. Control Interface: 490x330x310 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/SPC.pdf
.
SCSP Pressure Sensors Calibration System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bench-top unit.
Anodized aluminium structure.
Main metallic elements in stainless steel.
Diagram in the front panel.
Vacuum-meter of range (-9800 [ mmH2O] to 0).
Vacuum-meter of range (-1000 [ mmH2O] to 0).
Manometer of range (0 to 1000 [ mmH2O] ).
Manometer of range (0 to 2,5 [ bars]).
Mobile Piston (syringe).
8 valves.
Non-return valve.
Polyurethane tubes.
This system is supplied with atm, bares, psi, mmHg, mmH2O, conversion
tables.
This system allows the calibration of 6 sensors (same type) simultaneously.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =720 x 300 x 570 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electronics/transducerssensors/SCSP.pdf
Page 23 www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
CONTROL ELECTRONICS MODULE
Ref: 0240 1 / 2
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 RYC TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION 1
AND CONTROL, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
RYC.Unit TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION 1
AND CONTROL INCLUDING THE CONTROL INTERFACE
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
RYC/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF REGULATION AND CONTROL
2 RYC/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 1
REGULATION AND CONTROL (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
3 CADDA TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND 1
D/A CONVERTERS, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
CADDA Unit TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A 1
CONVERTERS INCLUDING CONTROL INTERFACE
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
CADDA/CCSOF COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION+ DATA 1
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A CONVERTERS
4 CADDA/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A/D 1
AND D/A CONVERTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
5 0240PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
6 0240PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
7 0240IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
8 0240CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
9 0240TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
10 0240MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0240 2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.4- Control Electronics
RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
2.- Electronics
Electronics
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
4 Cables and Accessories - Data Management
1 Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation 5 Manuals
and Control, including Control Interface
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.-Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional Block.
1RYC Unit: 2.-Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative Block.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
3.-Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
Steel box. 3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator. 2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier.
Module of Inverter Reductor. Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero. Module of Hysteresis. 4.-Study in open loop Nº4: Second order plants.
Module of Limiter. Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding.14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF. 5.-Study in open loop Nº5: Non-line plants: Limitation
6 Diodes. 34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers.186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. On/Off switch. and Hysteresis.
Fuse. Connector to PC. Control Interface. 6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks Composition:
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: Negative Zero and Negative Pole.
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. 7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by means of
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. Quantitative Optimum 1st order system.
3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by means of
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, Quantitative Optimum 2nd order system.
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on Other practical possibilities:
all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to
250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
of the conditions during the process. 9.-First order filter.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 10.-Integral regulator.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals. 11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance in the feedback.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg. 12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/RYC.pdf
CADDA. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) Converters
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2 3
Data Software for:
Acquisition - Computer Control
Board - Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
1 Unit: CADDA. Teaching Unit for the Study of A/D and D/A 5 Manuals
Converters, including Control Interface.
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1CADDA Unit:
1.- Sampling theorem.
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Steel box. 2.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Monopolar
In this unit, the elements are separated in two parts: lefthand part for analog to digital conversions, and assembly.
right hand part for digital to analog conversions. 3.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
Analog/Digital converter board. Digital/Analog converter board. 4.- Monopolar binary ramp converter.
5.- Quantification effects.
Signal generator board, with 100 to 330 mF capacitors, 10 to 50K potentiometers and 1 to 100K 6.-Bipolar binary ramp converter.
resistors. 7.-Binary ramp converter with continuous monopolar
Female and male connectors, interconnections. counting.
Power supply. 8.-Binary ramp converter with bipolar continuous
counting.
LPF-Low Pass Filter: 2nd order low pass filter, needed to convert analog signals to digital. Sample/Hold 9.-Monopolar simple ramp.
module. Comparator module. Clock module. Analog switch. Ramp module. A/D control module. D/A 10.- Bipolar simple ramp converter.
module, including an integrated digital to analog converter. A/D module, including an integrated 11.- Monopolar double ramp converter.
analog to digital converter. Counter module. Waveform generator. 8 analog switches, all are managed 12.- Double bipolar ramp converter.
by a PC. Weighted resistors: 8 resistances are connected to a common point. D/A module: same 13.- Monopolar converter of successive approximations.
14.- Bipolar converter of successive approximations.
module than described before “D/A”. Analog input and output for PC. Serial lock 1 module. Adding 15.- Integrated Digital/Analog converter. Monopolar
module: same module as previously described ”Adding”. Serial lock 2 module: same module than serial assembly.
lock 1, but based only on an inverter. R/2R : stair of resistance R/2R. Potentiometer. D/A control module. 16.- Digital/Analog integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
Operational amplifier. Two capacities of 100nF with common connection.Sample/Hold module: same 17.- Digitalization and reconstruction of monopolar signals.
18.- Digitalization and reconstruction of bipolar signals.
module as previously described “Sample/Hold”. 19.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of weighted
Control Interface. resistance.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board: 20.- Digital/Analog bipolar converter of weighted
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. resistance.
21.- Analog switches errors.
Sampling rate up to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs. 22.- R/2R monopolar stair converter.
3 CADDA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software: 23.- R/2R bipolar stair converter.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, 24.-Current division in R/2R stairs.
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously 25.-Digital/Analog converter of monopolar inverted stair.
26.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of inverted stair.
on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling 27.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of series blocking.
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process 28.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of series blocking.
and modification of the conditions during the process. 29.-Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. 30.-Bipolar Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
31.-Monopolar Digital/Analog converter of pulse width
modulation.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 450 x 470 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. 32.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of pulse width
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/CADDA.pdf modulation.
Page 24
issue:01/11
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0413-410/10S 1 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
LIELBA "DOMESTIC " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1 AD1A ROBBERY ALARM STATION,INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
ALI03 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC). 1
DET27 GLASS BREAK DETECTOR. 1
INT32 INTRUSION SWITCH/DETECTOR WITH RELAY 1000W. 2
SEL03 3-PILOTS LIGHTS. 1
SEL21 INDOOR SIREN. 1
VAR07 KIT: BURGLAR ALARM CENTRAL + INFRARED ELE. 1
+ BATTERY.
2 AD1/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
3 AD1/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 10
APPLICATION - BASIC ROBBERY ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
4 AD3A FIRE ALARM STATION, INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
ALI03 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC). 1
ALA02 FIRE ALARM STATION (WITH BATTERY). 1
DET06 SMOKE DETECTOR FOR DOMESTIC CONTROL. 1
DET21 FIRE DETECTOR THROUGH IONIZATION FOR 1
CENTRAL.
SEL21 INDOOR SIREN. 1
5 AD3/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION
6 AD3/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 10
APPLICATION - BASIC FIRE ALARM STATION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
7 AD5 APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS, 1
INCLUDED
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
CTI10 AUTOMATIC OF STAIRS 1
INT21 SWITCH + COMMUTATOR GROUP + BELL PUSH- 1
BUTTON.
LAM08 2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W. 2
LAM13 2 LOW CONSUMPTION FLUORESCENT LAMPS. 2
8 AD5/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS
9 AD5/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 10
APPLICATION - TEMPORIZATION OF STAIRS.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10 AD33 INSTALLATIONS FAULTS SIMULATOR,INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
COM14 2 COMMUTATORS. 2
ENC09 2-POLE EUROPEAN SOCKET WITH SAFETY DEVICE. 2
Ref: 0413-410/10S 2 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
10 COM21 INVERTER + GROUP OF 2 COMMUTATORS. 2
LAM08 2 LAMP-HOLDERS + INCANDESCENT LAMPS 40 W. 2
LAM09 FLUORESCENT LAMP. 1
MED65 DIGITAL MULTIMETER. 1
FUS04 3 FUSE-HOLDERS 10 A, 230 VAC (INCLUDE 1
2,4,6,10 A).
11 AD33/SOF* SOFTWARE DE ENSEÑANZA ASISTIDO DESDE 10
COMPUTADOR (PC) SIMULADOR DE FALLOS EN
INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
12 AD33/CAL SOFWARE DE APRENDIZAJE ASISTIDO DESDE 10
COMPUTADOR PARA CIRCUITOS C.C. (CÁLCULO Y
ANÁLISIS DE RESULTADOS) POR SIMULADOR DE
FALLOS EN INSTALACIONES ELECTRICAS
13 INS/SOF CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE 1
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
14 MUAD ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION 1
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
EPIB ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX 1
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
MUAD/SOF DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE 1
15 CABD CABLES KIT 1
16 0410PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
17 0410PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
18 0410IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
19 0410CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
20 0410TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
21 0410MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
Ref: 0413-410/10S 3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1 Frame 2 APPLICATIONS
2 APPLICATIONS (applications support)
(AD1A) (AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
High Safety anchorage system
Automatic earth
(AD3A) connection system (AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5) (AI4)
(AD6A) (AI5)
Sight of the frame
4.- Electricity
with some modules allocated
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
(AD8) Teaching
Technique (AE7)
used
INS/SOF. Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A) (AE8)
4 MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13) (AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations: ! Industrial Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station. AD22. Flooding control station. AI1. Star-delta starter. AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o - contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AD3A. Fire alarm station. AD23. Wireless basic control transformer. AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AD5. Temporization of stairs. station (RF). AI3. Speed commutator for AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
AD6A. Luminosity control station. AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r Dahlander motor. ! Energy Installations:
AI4. Starter-inverter. AE1. Aerial line model.
AD8. Blinds activator. domestic electric services AI5. AC wound rotor motor AE2. Reactive energy control and
AD9A. Heating control station. through the telephone. starter. compensation.
AD11A. Network analyzer. AD28A. Integral control station of AI6. DC motor starter. AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
domestic electric systems. AI7. Automatic change of speed switches.
AD13. Audio door entry system. of a Dahlander motor with AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AD14. Audio and video door AD30. Gas control station. change of direction. AE5. Relay control station.
entry system. AD31. Movement and sound AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m - AE6. Energy counters control station.
detection and control. pensation (Power factor AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
AD15A. Position control station. correction). station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t AE8. Power & torque measurements of
position station. analyzer. indirect electrical contacts electrical motors.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s in TT neutral regimen. AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
AD24. Position Switch. AI10. People safety against indirect Directional power flow detection. Reactive
AD19A. Sound station. simulator. electrical contacts in TN power flow detection.
neutral regimen.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
Applications
4.- Electricity
2
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights. 4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control. 2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central. 3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
SEL21. Indoor Siren. 4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector. fire.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs. 3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the control station.
COM14. 2 Commutators. 2.- Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. 3.- Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac. 4.- Test of the station by movement sensor.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps. 5.- Luminosity control.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp. 6.- Complete control.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector. 2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
DET20. Light Detector. 3.- Blind activation by sensors.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating. 2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units). 3.- Test with several temperatures.
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD11A. Network Analyzer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
4.- Electricity
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A). frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz). of a 220V single-phase circuit.
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V). 2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V. frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V. of a 380V three-phase circuit.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- To check the interphone operation.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock. 2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with sensors.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches. 3.- Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP. 4.- Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor. sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor. 5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the control station.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units). 3.- Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor. 4.- Test of the detection with compact sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor. 5.- Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor). 6.- Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter). 7.- Test with only emitters and receptors.
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply. 2.- MBB Micro-switch.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac). 3.- BBM Micro-switch.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Mono-stereo system installation.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator. 2.- Mono system with warnings reception.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units). 3.- Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD06. Basic Audio Central. 4.- Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator. 5.- Background Music installation.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the flooding control.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Smoke detection.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Gas detection and electro-valve control.
CTR01. Basic Control Module. 3.- Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units). 4.- Temperature and Battery.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Intrusion detection.
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control. 6.- Wireless detection.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 7.- Complete control of home electric services through the
DET12. Gas Electro-valve. telephone.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the complete system with the smoke,
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). flooding and gas detectors.
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W. 2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
CTR07. Timers Module. detectors.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V. 3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules. 4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
CTR18. Infrared Receptor. instrusion detectors.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control. detectors.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control. 6.- Electro-valves activation.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
DET12. Gas Electro-valve. control.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD30. Gas Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Gas detection.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Electro-valve activation.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light. 2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
4.- Electricity
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc). 2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units). 2.- Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units). 3.- Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units). 4.- Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
LAM01. Lamps. 5.- Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units). base.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp. 6.- To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
MED65. Digital Multimeter. 7.- To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box. 8.- To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 9.- To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. 3.- Measurement of the star current and delta current.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac). 4.- Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the commutator.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. motor.
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac). 2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules: PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Direct starter.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor). 2.- Starter rheostat.
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A, 2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
Curve C. and consumption measurements.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units). 3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units). speed.
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units). 4.- Change to low speed.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). 5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
3.- Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W. 4.- Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
5.- Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF. 6.- Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units). 7.- Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters. 8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W. 2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
COM12.Commutator/Switch. switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). 3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules: PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units). 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer. 2.- Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA, 3.- Indirect contact with defect mass.
class A. 4.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W. TN-C conditions.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf TN-S conditions.
Page 42
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation simple fault. 5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units). 2.- Study of an isolation double fault
CPA. Isolation Permanent Controller. (only with one mass).
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W. 3.- Study with several masses.
Resistance 10 W.
More information in: 4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Direct starting of a three-phase phase motor with microswitch and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). motor through contactor, with some push-buttons box.
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2 stop and start push-buttons. 10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
units). 2.- Configuration of a magnetic inverter of a three-phase motor.
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps. protection system, with stop mush 11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units). room button. three-phase motor.
VAR09. Frequency variator. 3.- Direct starting of a three-phase 12.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
motor by GV protector with a switch. phase motor with microswitch, with
4.- Electricity
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module 4.- Direct starting of a three-phase start push-buttons, stop and
(2 units). motor through impulses contactor. function cycle. (Direct).
REL45. Module with disjunctor. 5.- Direct starting of a three-phase 13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic motor by GV protector with push- three-phase motor.
Switch,4A,Curve C buttons and signalling. 14.- Control of a single phase motor
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power 6.- Direct starting of a three-phase direct and, with time-delay
fuses. motor by GV protector with two connection and disconnection.
boxes of push-buttons and 15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom signalling.
made). single- phase voltage.
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made). 7.- Turning inverted starter of a three- 16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
phase motor stopping before turning 17.-Parameters of the motor through
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage). in the opposite direction.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). software.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a three- 18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor. phase motor without stopping before
More information in: motor.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ turning in the opposite direction.
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf 9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
Estatic Electricity: 28.-Identification, coils measurement
ALI10. Power Supply Module 1.- Static electricity checking,with an and starting-up of a single-phase
CAR30. Inductances Module electroscope and anelectrometer. motor.
CAR31. Capacitors Module 2.- Static electricity experiments. 29.-Identification, measurement and
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current starting-up of an universal motor.
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module (AC): 30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
3.- Ohm´s law verification. starting-up of a three phase motor.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp Transformers:
4.- Installation of the resistive components
LAM26. Lighting Module module. 31.-Experiments and practices with a
MED65.Digital Multimeter 5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series. dismantled transformer.
REL50. Relays Module. 6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel. 32.-Identification of the three-phase
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage) 7.- Power measurement of a resistive transformer.
circuit. 33.-Connection as single-phase
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor. transformer.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
TRA28. Three-phase transformer parallel. 34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of 9.- Connection of lamps in series. 35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
motor/generator 10.-Lamps in parallel. connection .
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit 11.-Analysis of the variable resistances 36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
response curve. connection.
VAR18. Electrostatic kit 37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
VAR25. Open Universal Motor. 38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of 39.-Transformer with coils in series in
More information in: Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of phase.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf and Norton´s Theorem. 40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
15.-Application of the superposition 41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
theorem. 42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta. 43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the 44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
alternating current. 45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle Rectification and filtrate:
among voltages (AC). 46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
Dynamic Electricity: response curve.
19.- Identification of the components of the 47.-Half wave rectification .
trainer. 48.-Rectification to feed the universal
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of motor.
the measurement instruments 49.-Double wave rectification with two
Electric capacity: windings.
21.-Load and unload analysis of a 50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
capacitor. 51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and 52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electromagnetic induction: Electric circuits:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction. 53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction. 54.-Lamps controlled from two points
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment. and from three points.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets). 55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
Motors: 56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
26.-Electric motors 57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
27.-Generators.
Page 43 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Measurement of the voltage without loads.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- Measurement of the voltage with loads.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA. 4.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model. 5.- Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
TRA18. Petersen Coil. Petersen coil.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set with inductive load.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
4.- Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
1.- To connect the set.
4.- Electricity
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W. 2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C. switch breaks.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made). 3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To connect the transformers to line.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth. 2.- To connect the protection relay.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W. 2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. counter.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- To simulate faults in the line.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included). parameters.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. 4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). and the torque of the motor.
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A). 3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the set.
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 2.- Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load. 4.- To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. certain limit.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
4.- Electricity
Application
(several modules)
+ the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
Instructor Student/Application students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
Software Software all the information on the subject of study.
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations: AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic AI6/SOF. DC motor starter. ! Energy Installations:
AD1A/SOF Robbery alarm Station.
. electric services through the AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station. telephone. speed of a Dahlander AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs. AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of motor with change of compensation.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l domesticelectric systems. direction. AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
station. AD30/SOF. Gas control station. AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m - automaticswitches.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator. AD31/SOF. Movement and sound pensation (Power factor AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station. detection and control. correction). automatic switches.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer. AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits AI9/SOF Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
. AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y analyzer. indirect electrical c o n t a c t s AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
system. AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s inTT neutral regimen. station.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door simulator. AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
entry system. Industrial Electrical Installations: electrical contacts in TN protection station.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station. AI1/SOF. Star-delta starter. neutral regimen. AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control AI2/SOF. Starter through auto- AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect of electrical motors.
position station. transformer. electrical contacts in IT neutral AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
AD24/SOF. Position Switch. AI3/SOF. Speed commutator for regimen. detection. Directional power
AD19A/SOF.Sound station. Dahlander motor. AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors). flow detection. Reactive
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station. AI4/SOF. Starter-inverter. AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r power flow detection.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control AI5/SOF. AC wound rotor motor Electrotecnics.
station (RF). starter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
Data Acquisition
4 4 MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
Cables to Data acquisition analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
1
2
interface software MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
(MUAD/SOF)
3
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
Data acquisition
Connections
points We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
(DAB)
4
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
board
“n” Electric power Cable to
interface box computer
Student placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
Application (EPIB) post (DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
4.- Electricity
Analog Input Channels: EPIB
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536. DAB
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
MUAD/SOF
Page 46
issue:01/11
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0413-411/10S 1 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
LIEBA BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1 AD9A HEATING CONTROL STATION,INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
MED76 THERMOSTAT FOR HEATING. 1
MED77 THERMOSTAT FOR HEATING AND REFRIGERATION. 1
SEL09 DOUBLE LUMINOUS SIGNALLING RED-GREEN 230 2
VAC.
TIM01 BELL 70DB, 230 V. 2
2 AD9A/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - HEATING CONTROL STATION
3 AD9A/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
HEATING CONTROL STATION
4 AD14 APPLICATION - AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY 1
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
POR06 LOCK. 1
POR05 PHONE/MONITOR. 1
POR04 VIDEO CAMERA. 1
POR07 DIGITAL STATION. 1
POR08 VIDEO-INTERPHONE POWER SUPPLY. 1
5 AD14/SOF * COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C 10
CIRCUITS - AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
6 AD14/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 10
APPLICATION - AUDIO AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
7 AD15A POSITION CONTROL STATION,INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
ALI03 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC). 1
INT14 1-POLE 2 SWITCHES. 1
SEL01 LIGHT SIGNALLING BEACONS. 1
SEN04 CYLINDRICAL INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR TYPE 1
PNP.
SEN14 AC CYLINDRICAL CAPACITIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR. 1
SEN29 AC CYLINDRICAL INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SENSOR. 1
SEN01 INSTANTANEOUS MICRO-SWITCH. 1
SEN26 PRESENCE AND MOVEMENT SENSOR (WALL). 1
8 AD15A/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - POSITION AND CONTROL STATION
9 AD15A/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 10
POSITION CONTROL STATION
10 AD19A SOUND STATION,INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
ALI03 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC). 1
AUD01 ANALOG SOUND REGULATOR. 1
AUD04 SPEAKER OF 2", 2W, 8OHM. 3
Ref: 0413-411/10S 2 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
10 AUD06 BASIC AUDIO CENTRAL. 1
AUD20 ANALOG SOUND REGULATOR (MONO-STEREO). 1
AUD02 DIGITAL SOUND REGULATOR. 1
AUD05 SPEAKER OF 4", 7W, 8OHM. 3
AUD03 WARNINGS EMITTER MODULE. 1
AUD08 BACKGROUND MUSIC REGULATOR 3W. 1
AUD10 DOUBLE BACKGROUND MUSIC REGULATOR. 1
11 AD19A/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 5
APPLICATION - SOUND STATION
12 AD19A/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C. 5
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS) - SOUND STATION
13 AD23 APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL 1
STATION (RF),INCLUDED:
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
ALI03 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC). 1
DET13 WIRELESS INTRUSION DETECTOR RF. 1
DET14 WIRELESS PANIC PUSH-BUTTON RF. 1
DET15 WIRELESS 1-CHANNEL RECEPTOR RF. 1
SEL01 LIGHT SIGNALLING BEACONS. 1
TIM05 BELL + BUZZER. 1
14 AD23/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL
STATION (RF)
15 AD23/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 10
APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL
STATION (RF). (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
16 AD30 APPLICATION - GAS CONTROL STATION,INCLUDED: 1
ALI02 DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY. 1
ALI03 AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC). 1
DET12 GAS ELECTRO-VALVE. 1
DET03 FITTED POWER SUPPLY (GAS AND FLOODING 1
DETECTOR).
DET02 GAS DETECTOR. 1
17 AD30/SOF* COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE 10
APPLICATION - GAS CONTROL STATION
18 AD23/CAL COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE 10
APPLICATION - WIRELESS BASIC CONTROL
STATION (RF). (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
19 INS/SOF CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE 1
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
20 MUAD ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION 1
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
EPIB ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX 1
DAB DATA ACQUISITION BOARD 1
MUAD/SOF DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE 1
21 CABD CABLES KIT 1
22 0411PARTS COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS 1
Ref: 0413-411/10S 3 / 3
ITEM REFERENCE DESCRIPTION QTY.
23 0411PA COMPLEMENTARY ITEM 1
24 0411IYPM INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP 1
25 0411CAPRO TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS 1
26 0411MANU DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS 1
27 0411TD TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW" 1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
. Required services manual.
. Assembly and installation manual.
. Interface and software/control console manual.
. Set in operation manual.
. Safety norms manual.
. Practices manual.
. Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1 Frame 2 APPLICATIONS
2 APPLICATIONS (applications support)
(AD1A) (AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
High Safety anchorage system
Automatic earth
(AD3A) connection system (AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5) (AI4)
(AD6A) (AI5)
Sight of the frame
4.- Electricity
with some modules allocated
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
(AD8) Teaching
Technique (AE7)
used
INS/SOF. Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A) (AE8)
4 MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13) (AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations: ! Industrial Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station. AD22. Flooding control station. AI1. Star-delta starter. AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o - contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AD3A. Fire alarm station. AD23. Wireless basic control transformer. AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AD5. Temporization of stairs. station (RF). AI3. Speed commutator for AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
AD6A. Luminosity control station. AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r Dahlander motor. ! Energy Installations:
AI4. Starter-inverter. AE1. Aerial line model.
AD8. Blinds activator. domestic electric services AI5. AC wound rotor motor AE2. Reactive energy control and
AD9A. Heating control station. through the telephone. starter. compensation.
AD11A. Network analyzer. AD28A. Integral control station of AI6. DC motor starter. AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
domestic electric systems. AI7. Automatic change of speed switches.
AD13. Audio door entry system. of a Dahlander motor with AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AD14. Audio and video door AD30. Gas control station. change of direction. AE5. Relay control station.
entry system. AD31. Movement and sound AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m - AE6. Energy counters control station.
detection and control. pensation (Power factor AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
AD15A. Position control station. correction). station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t AE8. Power & torque measurements of
position station. analyzer. indirect electrical contacts electrical motors.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s in TT neutral regimen. AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
AD24. Position Switch. AI10. People safety against indirect Directional power flow detection. Reactive
AD19A. Sound station. simulator. electrical contacts in TN power flow detection.
neutral regimen.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
Applications
4.- Electricity
2
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights. 4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). alarm.
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control. 2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central. 3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
SEL21. Indoor Siren. 4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector. fire.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs. 3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the control station.
COM14. 2 Commutators. 2.- Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. 3.- Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac. 4.- Test of the station by movement sensor.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps. 5.- Luminosity control.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp. 6.- Complete control.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector. 2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
DET20. Light Detector. 3.- Blind activation by sensors.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating. 2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units). 3.- Test with several temperatures.
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD11A. Network Analyzer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
4.- Electricity
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A). frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz). of a 220V single-phase circuit.
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V). 2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V. frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V. of a 380V three-phase circuit.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- To check the interphone operation.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the system.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock. 2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the station with sensors.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches. 3.- Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP. 4.- Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor. sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor. 5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the control station.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units). 3.- Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor. 4.- Test of the detection with compact sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor. 5.- Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor). 6.- Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter). 7.- Test with only emitters and receptors.
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply. 2.- MBB Micro-switch.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac). 3.- BBM Micro-switch.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Mono-stereo system installation.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator. 2.- Mono system with warnings reception.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units). 3.- Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD06. Basic Audio Central. 4.- Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator. 5.- Background Music installation.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the flooding control.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Smoke detection.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Gas detection and electro-valve control.
CTR01. Basic Control Module. 3.- Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units). 4.- Temperature and Battery.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Intrusion detection.
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control. 6.- Wireless detection.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 7.- Complete control of home electric services through the
DET12. Gas Electro-valve. telephone.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the complete system with the smoke,
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). flooding and gas detectors.
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W. 2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
CTR07. Timers Module. detectors.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V. 3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules. 4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
CTR18. Infrared Receptor. instrusion detectors.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe). 5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control. detectors.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control. 6.- Electro-valves activation.
DET10. Water Electro-valve. 7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
DET12. Gas Electro-valve. control.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD30. Gas Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Gas detection.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Electro-valve activation.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light. 2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
4.- Electricity
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc). 2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 1.- Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units). 2.- Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units). 3.- Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units). 4.- Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
LAM01. Lamps. 5.- Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units). base.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp. 6.- To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
MED65. Digital Multimeter. 7.- To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box. 8.- To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 9.- To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. 3.- Measurement of the star current and delta current.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac). 4.- Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units). 2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the commutator.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C. motor.
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 1.- Assembly of the starter.
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac). 2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer. 3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the starter.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules: PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Direct starter.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor). 2.- Starter rheostat.
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A, 2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
Curve C. and consumption measurements.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units). 3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units). speed.
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units). 4.- Change to low speed.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). 5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply. 2.- Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
3.- Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W. 4.- Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
5.- Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF. 6.- Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units). 7.- Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters. 8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W. 2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
COM12.Commutator/Switch. switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). 3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules: PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units). 1.- Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer. 2.- Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA, 3.- Indirect contact with defect mass.
class A. 4.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W. TN-C conditions.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/ 5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf TN-S conditions.
Page 42
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Study of an isolation simple fault. 5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units). 2.- Study of an isolation double fault
CPA. Isolation Permanent Controller. (only with one mass).
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W. 3.- Study with several masses.
Resistance 10 W.
More information in: 4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Direct starting of a three-phase phase motor with microswitch and
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). motor through contactor, with some push-buttons box.
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2 stop and start push-buttons. 10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
units). 2.- Configuration of a magnetic inverter of a three-phase motor.
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps. protection system, with stop mush 11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units). room button. three-phase motor.
VAR09. Frequency variator. 3.- Direct starting of a three-phase 12.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
motor by GV protector with a switch. phase motor with microswitch, with
4.- Electricity
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module 4.- Direct starting of a three-phase start push-buttons, stop and
(2 units). motor through impulses contactor. function cycle. (Direct).
REL45. Module with disjunctor. 5.- Direct starting of a three-phase 13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic motor by GV protector with push- three-phase motor.
Switch,4A,Curve C buttons and signalling. 14.- Control of a single phase motor
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power 6.- Direct starting of a three-phase direct and, with time-delay
fuses. motor by GV protector with two connection and disconnection.
boxes of push-buttons and 15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom signalling.
made). single- phase voltage.
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made). 7.- Turning inverted starter of a three- 16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
phase motor stopping before turning 17.-Parameters of the motor through
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage). in the opposite direction.
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor). software.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a three- 18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor. phase motor without stopping before
More information in: motor.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ turning in the opposite direction.
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf 9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
Estatic Electricity: 28.-Identification, coils measurement
ALI10. Power Supply Module 1.- Static electricity checking,with an and starting-up of a single-phase
CAR30. Inductances Module electroscope and anelectrometer. motor.
CAR31. Capacitors Module 2.- Static electricity experiments. 29.-Identification, measurement and
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current starting-up of an universal motor.
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module (AC): 30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
3.- Ohm´s law verification. starting-up of a three phase motor.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp Transformers:
4.- Installation of the resistive components
LAM26. Lighting Module module. 31.-Experiments and practices with a
MED65.Digital Multimeter 5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series. dismantled transformer.
REL50. Relays Module. 6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel. 32.-Identification of the three-phase
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage) 7.- Power measurement of a resistive transformer.
circuit. 33.-Connection as single-phase
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor. transformer.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
TRA28. Three-phase transformer parallel. 34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of 9.- Connection of lamps in series. 35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
motor/generator 10.-Lamps in parallel. connection .
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit 11.-Analysis of the variable resistances 36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
response curve. connection.
VAR18. Electrostatic kit 37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
VAR25. Open Universal Motor. 38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of 39.-Transformer with coils in series in
More information in: Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of phase.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/ Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf and Norton´s Theorem. 40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
15.-Application of the superposition 41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
theorem. 42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta. 43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the 44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
alternating current. 45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle Rectification and filtrate:
among voltages (AC). 46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
Dynamic Electricity: response curve.
19.- Identification of the components of the 47.-Half wave rectification .
trainer. 48.-Rectification to feed the universal
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of motor.
the measurement instruments 49.-Double wave rectification with two
Electric capacity: windings.
21.-Load and unload analysis of a 50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
capacitor. 51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and 52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electromagnetic induction: Electric circuits:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction. 53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction. 54.-Lamps controlled from two points
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment. and from three points.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets). 55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
Motors: 56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
26.-Electric motors 57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
27.-Generators.
Page 43 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Measurement of the voltage without loads.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- Measurement of the voltage with loads.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA. 4.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model. 5.- Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
TRA18. Petersen Coil. Petersen coil.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set with inductive load.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
4.- Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
1.- To connect the set.
4.- Electricity
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W. 2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C. switch breaks.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made). 3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- To connect the transformers to line.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth. 2.- To connect the protection relay.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W. 2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. counter.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made). 2.- To simulate faults in the line.
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load. 3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included). parameters.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. 4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac). 2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac). and the torque of the motor.
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A). 3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications (continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules: 1.- Assembly of the set.
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply. 2.- Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac). 3.- To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load. 4.- To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA. certain limit.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
3 CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
4.- Electricity
Application
(several modules)
+ the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
Instructor Student/Application students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
Software Software all the information on the subject of study.
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations: AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic AI6/SOF. DC motor starter. ! Energy Installations:
AD1A/SOF Robbery alarm Station.
. electric services through the AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station. telephone. speed of a Dahlander AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs. AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of motor with change of compensation.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l domesticelectric systems. direction. AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
station. AD30/SOF. Gas control station. AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m - automaticswitches.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator. AD31/SOF. Movement and sound pensation (Power factor AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station. detection and control. correction). automatic switches.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer. AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits AI9/SOF Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
. AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y analyzer. indirect electrical c o n t a c t s AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
system. AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s inTT neutral regimen. station.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door simulator. AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
entry system. Industrial Electrical Installations: electrical contacts in TN protection station.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station. AI1/SOF. Star-delta starter. neutral regimen. AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control AI2/SOF. Starter through auto- AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect of electrical motors.
position station. transformer. electrical contacts in IT neutral AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
AD24/SOF. Position Switch. AI3/SOF. Speed commutator for regimen. detection. Directional power
AD19A/SOF.Sound station. Dahlander motor. AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors). flow detection. Reactive
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station. AI4/SOF. Starter-inverter. AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r power flow detection.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control AI5/SOF. AC wound rotor motor Electrotecnics.
station (RF). starter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45 www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity (continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
Data Acquisition
4 4 MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
Cables to Data acquisition analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
1
2
interface software MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
(MUAD/SOF)
3
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
Data acquisition
Connections
points We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
(DAB)
4
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
board
“n” Electric power Cable to
interface box computer
Student placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
Application (EPIB) post (DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
4.- Electricity
Analog Input Channels: EPIB
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536. DAB
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
MUAD/SOF
Page 46
Get documents about "